OM33809U
User Manual: 2008 Lexus ES 350 Service Manual | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 460 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mir-
rors, and steering column.
2When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3Interior features Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior
features for a comfortable driving experience.
4Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-your-
self maintenance, and maintenance information.
5When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire,
or is involved in an accident.
6Vehicle
specifications Detailed vehicle information.
7For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners and seat belt in-
structions for Canadian owners
Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
2
1-1. Key information ........................... 20
Keys ...................................................... 20
1-2. Opening, closing and locking
the doors and trunk .................. 22
Smart access system with
push-button start.......................... 22
Wireless remote control.............. 34
Doors.................................................... 37
Trunk...................................................... 41
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel).......................... 43
Front seats.......................................... 43
Driving position memory ............. 44
Seat position memory ................... 47
Head restraints................................. 49
Seat belts ........................................... 50
Steering wheel.................................. 56
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror ................................................ 57
Outside rear view mirrors.......... 58
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and moon roof .......... 60
Power windows................................ 60
Moon roof .......................................... 63
1-5. Refueling........................................ 67
Opening the fuel tank cap........... 67
1-6. Theft deterrent system............... 70
Engine immobilizer system......... 70
Alarm.................................................... 72
Theft prevention labels
(for USA)......................................... 74
1-7. Safety information....................... 75
Correct driving posture ............... 75
SRS airbags ....................................... 77
Front passenger occupant
classification system................... 88
Child restraint systems ................. 93
Installing child restraints............... 97
2-1. Driving procedures................... 108
Driving the vehicle........................ 108
Engine (ignition) switch ................ 116
Automatic Transmission .............. 119
Turn signal lever............................. 122
Parking brake ................................. 123
2-2. Instrument cluster ..................... 124
Gauges and meters ..................... 124
Indicators and warning lights ... 126
Multi-information display........... 130
1Before driving
2When driving
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers.................... 134
Headlight switch............................ 134
Fog light switch .............................. 137
Windshield wipers and
washer............................................. 138
2-4. Using other driving systems..... 141
Cruise control .................................. 141
Dynamic radar cruise
control............................................. 144
Intuitive parking assist ................. 153
Driving assist systems.................. 159
PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 162
2-5. Driving information................... 165
Cargo and luggage...................... 165
Vehicle load limits......................... 168
Winter driving tips ........................ 169
Trailer towing.................................. 175
Dinghy towing ................................ 182
3-1. Using the air conditioning
system and defogger............. 184
Automatic air conditioning
system ............................................. 184
Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers ............... 191
3-2. Using the audio system............ 192
Audio system type ........................ 192
Using the radio............................... 194
Using the CD player.................... 201
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs.................................. 207
Optimal use of the audio
system ............................................. 215
Using the AUX adapter............. 218
Using the steering wheel
audio switches............................. 219
3-3. Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone) ................ 221
Hands-free phone
system features
(for cellular phone).................... 221
Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone)................... 224
Making a phone call.................... 232
Setting a cellular phone............. 236
Security and system setup........ 240
Using the phone book................ 243
3-4. Using the interior lights.......... 249
Interior lights list............................ 249
• Front interior lights .................... 251
• Personal lights ............................. 251
3Interior features
TABLE OF CONTENTS Index
4
3-5. Using the storage features .... 252
List of storage features............... 252
• Glove box..................................... 252
• Console box................................ 253
• Overhead console.................... 255
• Cup holders................................. 256
• Auxiliary box .............................. 258
3-6. Other interior features........... 259
Sun visors......................................... 259
Vanity mirror................................. 260
Clock.................................................. 261
Ashtray ............................................. 262
Cigarette lighter........................... 263
Power outlet................................... 264
Seat heaters and
ventilators..................................... 265
Armrest ............................................ 267
Rear sunshade.............................. 268
Extended trunk.............................. 270
Floor mat........................................... 271
Trunk features................................ 272
Garage door opener.................. 274
Compass.......................................... 279
4-1. Maintenance and care............ 284
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior.................. 284
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.................... 287
4-2. Maintenance.............................. 290
Maintenance requirements .... 290
General maintenance................ 292
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs ...................................... 295
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance............................ 296
Do-it-yourself service
precautions.................................. 296
Hood................................................. 300
Positioning a floor jack................ 301
Engine compartment................. 303
Tires .................................................... 318
Tire inflation pressure................. 326
Wheels............................................. 330
Air conditioning filter.................. 332
Electronic key battery................ 334
Checking and replacing
fuses................................................ 336
Headlight aim
(vehicles with discharge
headlights).................................... 344
Light bulbs....................................... 345
4Maintenance and care
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
5
5-1. Essential information .............. 354
If your vehicle needs to
be towed....................................... 354
If you think something
is wrong........................................ 360
Fuel pump shut off system ......... 361
Event data recorder.................... 362
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency.............................. 364
If a warning light turns on
or a warning buzzer
sounds... ........................................ 364
If a warning message is
displayed....................................... 375
If you have a flat tire.................... 386
If the engine will not start .......... 396
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P............................. 398
If you lose your keys.................... 399
If the electronic key does
not operate properly .............. 400
If the vehicle battery is
discharged ................................... 402
If your vehicle overheats .......... 405
If the vehicle becomes
stuck................................................ 407
6-1. Specifications............................. 410
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.)...................... 410
Fuel information............................ 420
Tire information ............................ 423
6-2. Customization .......................... 435
Customizable features .............. 435
6-3. Initialization ............................... 440
Items to initialize ........................... 440
Reporting safety defects
for U.S. owners........................... 442
Seat belt instructions
for Canadian owners
(in French).................................... 443
Abbreviation list .................................. 446
Alphabetical index.............................. 448
What to do if... ...................................... 458
5When trouble arises 6Vehicle specifications
7For owners
Index
8
A
Pictorial index Interior
Power window switches
P. 60
SRS front passenger airbag
P. 77
SRS knee airbags
P. 77
SRS driver airbag
P. 77
Floor mat
P. 271
Console box
P. 253
Seat belts
P. 50
Front seats
P. 43
SRS side airbags
P. 77
Power outlet
P. 264
AUX adapter
P. 218
Head restraints
P. 49
Cup holders
P. 256
Armrest
P. 267
12
Pictorial index Instrument panel
Headlight switch
Turn signal lever
Fog light switch
P. 134
P. 122
P. 137
Gauges and meters
P. 124
Multi-information display
P. 130
Windshield wipers and
washer switch
P. 138
Engine (ignition) switch
P. 116
Trunk opener main switch
P. 41
Glove box
P. 252
Tilt and telescopic steering control switch
P. 56
Parking brake pedal
P. 123
Audio remote control switches
P. 219
Hood lock release lever
P. 300
Tire pressure warning system reset switch
P. 320
Adaptive front lighting system cancel switch
P. 135
Tire pressure warning system select switch
P. 321
13
A Without navigation system
Navigation system*
Clock
P. 261
Audio system
P. 192
Air conditioning
system
P. 184
Rear window and out-
side rear view mirror
defoggers
P. 191
Security indicator
P. 70, 72
Emergency flashers
Audio system*
Security indicator
P. 70, 72
Emergency flashers
Air conditioning
system*
With navigation system
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Rear window and
outside rear view
mirror defoggers
P. 191
Clock
P. 261
15
C
Rear sunshade
switch
P. 268
Intuitive parking assist
switch *
P. 153
Instrument panel light
control
P. 125
: If equipped
*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Outside rear view mirror switch
P. 58
Auxiliary box
P. 258
Type A
Type B
Trunk opener
P. 41
Fuel filler door opener
P. 67
Rear sunshade
switch
P. 268
Instrument panel light
control
P. 125
Outside rear view mirror switch
P. 58
Auxiliary box
P. 258
Trunk opener
P. 41
Fuel filler door opener
P. 67
16
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, includ-
ing options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed
on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. How-
ever, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the
right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from
your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are
currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant
these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement,
or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your
Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification
with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or perfor-
mance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under war-
ranty.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, cruise control system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag sys-
tem and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for
precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.
17
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive
chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left
as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of
the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified
service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may
include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.
CAUTION
■General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of
alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol
and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination,
which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers
or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts
the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can
result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or
others.
■General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or
use the key.
When left unattended, children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle
into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing
with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehi-
cle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can
be fatal to children.
18
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the
risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its
equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”,
“Do not do this”, or “Do not let this happen.”
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).
Before driving 1
19
1-1. Key information ............... 20
Keys.............................................. 20
1-2. Opening, closing and
locking the doors and
trunk ............................... 22
Smart access system with
push-button start .................... 22
Wireless remote control......... 34
Doors ............................................ 37
Trunk .............................................. 41
1-3. Adjustable components
(seats, mirrors,
steering wheel).............. 43
Front seats................................... 43
Driving position memory........ 44
Seat position memory.............. 47
Head restraints.......................... 49
Seat belts .................................... 50
Steering wheel........................... 56
Anti-glare inside rear view
mirror......................................... 57
Outside rear view mirrors..... 58
1-4. Opening and closing the
windows and
moon roof....................... 60
Power windows.......................... 60
Moon roof................................... 63
1-5. Refueling .......................... 67
Opening the fuel tank cap ...... 67
1-6. Theft deterrent
system............................. 70
Engine immobilizer
system........................................ 70
Alarm............................................ 72
Theft prevention labels
(for USA)................................... 74
1-7. Safety information........... 75
Correct driving posture ......... 75
SRS airbags ................................ 77
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............. 88
Child restraint systems ........... 93
Installing child restraints......... 97
20
1-1. Key information
Keys
Using the mechanical key
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the entry
function does not operate properly,
you will need the mechanical key.
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart access
system with push-button start
(P. 22)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(P. 3 4 )
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
■When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF and lock the glove box and the armrest
door as circumstances demand. (P. 41, 2 52, 270)
Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the
electronic key only.
■Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that
a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key
number plate. (P. 399 )
21
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■To prevent key damage
●Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high temperatures by
placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
●Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that
blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
●Do not disassemble the electronic key.
22
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart access system with push-button start
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the elec-
tronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 23 )
Unlocks the trunk (P. 2 3)
Starts the engine (P. 116)
23
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Locking and unlocking the doors
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Pressing and holding the button
closes the windows and standard
moon roof.
Grip the handle to unlock the
door.
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for 3
seconds after the door is locked.
Unlocking the trunk
Press and hold the button to
unlock the trunk.
24
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Antenna location and effective range
■Antenna location
Antennas outside cabin
Antennas inside cabin
Antenna inside trunk
Antenna outside trunk
25
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
any of the outside door han-
dles. (Only the doors detect-
ing the key can be operated.)
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (70 cm) of
the trunk release button.
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows
and standard moon roof are operating.
■Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the
door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once
more.
■Conditions affecting operation
The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the fol-
lowing situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle
may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start and
wireless remote control from operating properly:
(Ways of coping: P. 400 )
●When the electronic key battery is depleted
●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display,
airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise
●When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wire-
less communication devices
●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metal-
lic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
•Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
●When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
●When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices
that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear
window
■Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and
hold , , or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing
on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When
changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds,
and repeat step 2.)
Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the
doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors
will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 72)
STEP 1
STEP 2
Multi-information
display Unlocking doors Beep
Hold the driver's door handle
to unlock only the driver's
door Exterior: Beeps three
times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the door handle except
a driver’s door handle to
unlock all doors
Hold any door handle to
unlock all doors
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
STEP 3
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the
vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
●When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
●When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the
vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
●The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function.
(P. 3 4 )
●The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (P. 400 )
■Electronic key battery depletion
●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
●The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used because
the key always transmits radio waves. If the smart access system with push-but-
ton start or the wireless remote control does not operate, or the detection area
becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when nec-
essary. ( P. 33 4 )
●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of
the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
•Glass top ranges
• Table lamps
■To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the
electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside
of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may
not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may
go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Note for the entry function
●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the
system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the
ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the
rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear package tray or floor, or in
the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch
modes are changed.
●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be
locked or unlocked by anyone.
●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the
engine if the electronic key is near the window.
●The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,
such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after
approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)
●Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key
is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the
entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)
●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors
from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position
and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.
■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle.
■Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the
multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable
accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in
response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (P. 375)
The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only
alarms are sounded.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 2
seconds
Tried to lock the doors using
the entry function while the
electronic key is still inside
the passenger compartment
Retrieve the electronic
key from the passenger
compartment and lock
the doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
the trunk and all doors are
locked
Retrieve the electronic
key from the trunk and
close the trunk lid.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 60
seconds
Tried to exit the vehicle with
the electronic key and lock
the doors without first turning
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF
Tu r n t h e “ EN G I N E
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the doors
again.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 10
seconds
Tried to lock the vehicle using
the entry function while a
door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for 3
seconds and inte-
rior alarm sounds
continuously
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCES-
SORY or IGNITION ON
mode, an attempt was made
to open the door and exit the
vehicle, and the shift lever
was not in P.
Shift the shift lever to P.
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly
●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 4 00)
●Starting the engine:P. 116
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 3 3 4
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start) can be deactivated.
(Customizable features P. 435)
■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start
For vehicles sold in the USA
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm pings
continuously
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCES-
SORY mode while the
driver's door is open
(Opened the driver's door
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCES-
SORY mode.)
Tu r n t h e “ EN G I N E
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door.
Turned the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF while the
driver's door is open
Close the driver's door.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-3
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
●Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
●People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away
from the smart access system antennas. (P. 24)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry
function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency
of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves. Then, consult your doctor
to see if you should disable the entry function.
●User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and
implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for
information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical
devices.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
■2-step unlocking function
When you push the button, the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing the button
again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.
■Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
Windows and standard moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows
and standard moon roof are operating.
■Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds for 10 seconds if an attempt to lock the
door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once
more.
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 28
■Security feature
P. 2 9
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and
the trunk from outside the vehicle.
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
Opens the windows and
standard moon roof
(push and hold)
Unlocks the trunk
(push and hold)
Sounds alarm
(push and hold) (P. 72)
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
P. 3 3 4
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 26
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed. (Customizable features
P. 4 35 )
■Certification for wireless remote control
For vehicles sold in the USA
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
●Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE:
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
37
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless
remote control or door lock switch.
■Entry function
P. 22
■Wireless remote control
P. 3 4
■Door lock switch
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
■Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle even
if the lock buttons are in the lock
position.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Locking the front doors from the outside without a key
The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left
inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected
correctly and the door may be locked.
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle when the
locks are set.
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
Function Operation
Shift position linked door
locking function Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all doors.
Shift position linked door
unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door locking
function
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is
opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:
Close all the doors and switch the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to IGNITION ON mode. (Perform the step 2 within 10
seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch ( or ) for approxi-
mately 5 seconds and then
release.
The shift lever and switch positions
corresponding to the desired func-
tion to be set or canceled are
shown as follows.
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked
and then unlocked.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Function Shift lever position Switch position
Shift position linked door locking
function P
Shift position linked door unlock-
ing function
Speed linked door locking function
N
Driver's door linked door unlocking
function
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Impact detection door lock release system
In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.
Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system
may not operate.
■Using the mechanical key
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 400)
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (Customizable fea-
tures P. 435)
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in
death or serious injury.
●Always use a seat belt.
●Always lock all doors.
●Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
●Do not pull the inside handle while driving.
●Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.
41
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Trunk
Locking the trunk opener feature
Turn the main switch in the glove
box OFF to disable the trunk
opener.
ON
OFF
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the trunk opener, the
wireless remote control or the
entry function.
The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless
remote control.
■Trunk opener
Release the trunk lid.
■Entry function
P. 22
■Wireless remote control
P. 3 4
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■Tr u n k ha nd le
■Internal trunk release lever
■Tr u n k li gh t
The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the trunk lid closed.
This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
■When children are in the vehicle
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the
vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate, resulting in
death or serious injury.
Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk.
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down
on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the
inside of trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some time
after the trunk lid is closed.
43
1
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment
Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to reduce
the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
Seat leg support adjusting switch (driver’s seat) (if equipped)
44
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Driving position memory (if equipped)
Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering
wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be memorized and recalled with
the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate auto-
matically when the doors are unlocked.
Two different driving positions can be entered into memory.
■Entering a position to memory
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
While pushing the SET button,
push button 1 or 2 until the sig-
nal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previ-
ously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push button 1 or 2 to recall the
memorized position.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
45
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation
Record your driving position to button 1 or 2 before performing the fol-
lowing.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the
driver's door.
While pressing the desired button
(1 or 2), press on the wire-
less remote control until the signal
beeps.
The driving position is recalled
when the driver's door is unlocked
using the entry function or wireless
remote control and the driver’s
door is opened.
Open one of the doors.
If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the
doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.
In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.
(P. 72 )
STEP 1
STEP 2
■Canceling the linked door unlock operation
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and close the driver's door.
While pushing the SET button, press on the wireless remote con-
trol until the signal beeps.
■Retained accessory power
Memorized positions (except for the steering wheel positions) can be activated up
to 30 seconds after the driver's door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
46
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
●Push the SET button.
●Push button 1 or 2.
●Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall).
■If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or
squeeze your body against the steering wheel.
47
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Seat position memory (if equipped)
Your preferred front passenger seat position can be memorized and
recalled with the touch of a button.
Two different seat positions can be entered into memory.
■Entering a position to memory
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Adjust the front passenger seat to the desired position.
While pushing the SET button,
push button 1 or 2 until the sig-
nal beeps.
If the selected button has
already been preset, the previ-
ously recorded position will be
overwritten.
■Recalling the memorized position
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Push button 1 or 2 to recall the
memorized position.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
48
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■Retained accessory power
Memorized position can be activated up to 30 seconds after the front passenger
door is opened, even after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
■To cancel seat position recall
Perform any of the following operations.
●Push the SET button.
●Push button 1 or 2.
●Adjust the seat position using the switches.
■If the battery is disconnected
The memorized positions are erased when the battery is disconnected.
CAUTION
■Seat adjustment caution
Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger.
49
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Head restraints
■Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■Adjusting the rear seat head restraints
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using.
CAUTION
■Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so
may result in death or serious injury.
●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Vertical adjustment
Push and hold the lock release
button when lowering the head
restraint.
Removal
Pull the head restraint up while
pushing the lock release button.
Lock
release
button
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
50
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the
vehicle.
■Correct use of the seat belts
●Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not come
into contact with the neck or
slide off the shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low as
possible over the hips.
●Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight and
well back in the seat.
●Do not twist the seat belt.
■Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle until
a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
51
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a
person’s neck, slide the seat belt
comfort guide forward.
Seat belt pretensioners (front and outside rear seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal colli-
sion.
The pretensioner may not activate
in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
■Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Down
Up
Move the height adjuster up and
down as needed until you hear a
click.
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system)
When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a
collision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting
the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the
driver and passenger at an earlier stage.
The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (P. 162)
■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if
you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that
you can move around fully.
■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even
slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is
used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully
retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 97 )
■Pregnant women
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt
in the proper way. (P. 5 0 )
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in
the same manner as other occupants. Extend
the shoulder belt completely over the shoul-
der and position the belt across the chest.
Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the
abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a
pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suf-
fer death or serious injury as a result of sud-
den braking or a collision.
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
■Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.
●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child become
large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 93 )
●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt,
follow the instructions on P. 50 regarding seat belt usage.
■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.
■Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely
because they are not long enough, a person-
alized seat belt extender is available from
your Lexus dealer free of charge.
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden
braking or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■Wearing a seat belt
●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
●Always wear a seat belt properly.
●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more
than one person at once, including children.
●Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat
belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
●Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating
position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats.
●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■Seat belt pretensioners
●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat. Doing so
will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting
the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the
front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of a collision.
●If the pretensioner has activated, the seat belt becomes locked: it cannot be fur-
ther extended, nor will it return to the stowed position. The seat belt cannot be
used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Seat belt damage and wear
●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed
in the door.
●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.
Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot
protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus
dealer.
●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in
a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.
●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.
Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate han-
dling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly resulting in
death or serious injury.
■Using a seat belt extender
●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because
the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of
death or injury in the event of a collision.
●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by
another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally
intended.
NOTICE
■When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
Auto tilt away
When the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned OFF, the
steering wheel returns to its
stowed position by moving up and
away to enable easier driver entry
and exit.
Turning the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode will return
the steering wheel to the original
position.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Up
Down
Away from the driver
Toward the driver
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
57
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
■To prevent sensor error
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death
or serious injury.
In AUTO mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles
behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.
Turns AUTO mode ON/OFF
The indicator comes on when
AUTO mode is turned ON.
The anti-glare mirror default
mode is AUTO. The anti-glare
mirror is automatically set to
AUTO whenever the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is turned
on.
To ensure that the sensors operate properly,
do not touch or cover it.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Outside rear view mirrors
■When the mirrors are fogged up
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (P. 1 9 1)
■Folding back the mirrors
■One-touch adjustment of the mirror angle
(vehicles with driving position memory)
A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and adjusted with the touch
of a button. (P. 44)
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Select a mirror to adjust
(L: left or R: right)
Adjust the mirror up, down,
in, or out using the switch
Push back in the direction of the vehicle's
rear.
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■Linked mirror function when reversing (vehicles with driving position memory)
The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle
is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will
not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (between L and
R).
■Auto anti-glare function
When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to AUTO mode, the outside rear
view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to
reduce reflected light. (P. 57 )
CAUTION
■When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
●Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly
adjusted before driving.
■When the mirror defoggers are operating
Do not touch the surface of the mirror, as it may be hot.
60
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Power windows
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock pas-
senger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent children
from accidentally opening or clos-
ing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
One-touch closing*
Opening
One-touch opening*
*: Pushing the switch in the oppo-
site direction will stop window
travel partway.
61
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■The power windows can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Linked door lock window operation
●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.
(P. 400)
●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P.
34)
●The power windows can be closed using the entry function. (P. 2 2)
■Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
OFF
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window
travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features
P. 4 35 )
62
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a
position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in some
instances, even death.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the window fully closes.
63
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
Before driving
Moon roof
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and
down.
■Opening and closing
Standard type
Open
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully opened position.
Push the switch again to fully
open.
Close
Push the switch in the either direc-
tion to stop the moon roof partway.
Glass type
Open
Close (push and hold)
The moon roof stops once. Push
and hold the switch again to fully
close.
64
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
■Tilting up and down
Standard type
Tilt up
Tilt down
Push the switch in the either side to
stop the moon roof partway.
Glass type
Tilt up
Push the switch in the either side
to stop the moon roof partway.
Tilt down (push and hold)
65
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
1
Before driving
■The moon roof can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Linked door lock moon roof operation (standard type)
●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (P. 400)
●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (P. 3 4 )
●The moon roof can be closed using the entry function. (P. 22)
■Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is switched to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
■Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting
down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■To reduce moon roof wind noise (standard type)
Drive with the moon roof opened to slightly before the fully open position as driving
with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind noise.
■Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will
open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (Customizable features
P. 4 35 )
66
1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof
CAUTION
■Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while
it is moving.
●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a
position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.
●Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■Jam protection function
●Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function
intentionally.
●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before
the moon roof fully closes.
67
1
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■Before refueling the vehicle
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that all
the doors and windows are closed.
■Opening the fuel tank cap
Open the fuel filler door.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to
open.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
68
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank cap,
turn it until a clicking sound is
heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
■Fuel types
Use unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane rating [Research Octane Number 96] or
higher)
■Fuel tank capacity
Approximately 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 Imp. gal.)
■When the fuel filler door opener is inoperable
The lever can be used to open the fuel filler
door if the fuel filler door cannot be opened
using the inside switch because the battery is
discharged or for any other reason.
69
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may
result in death or serious injury.
●Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to
ignite.
●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until
the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressur-
ized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.
●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to
come close to an open fuel tank.
●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.
■When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.
Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or seri-
ous injury.
NOTICE
■Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted
surface.
70
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
■System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.
■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
●If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object
●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key
with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system
For vehicles sold in the USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine
from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's
on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF to
indicate that the system is oper-
ating.
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
71
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the key
Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unautho-
rized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system can-
not be guaranteed.
72
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Alarm
Deactivating or stopping the alarm
Do one of the following:
●Unlock the doors or trunk using the entry function or the wireless
remote door lock function.
●Start the engine.
■Items to check before locking the vehicle
To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, check that there is no one in the vehi-
cle, and that all windows and moon roof are closed before locking the vehicle.
The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry is
detected.
Close the moon roof and all
windows. Stop the engine.
The engine immobilizer system
causes the indicator light to
flash.
After all people exit out of the
vehicle, close the doors, trunk
and hood, and lock all doors.
The indicator light comes on.
The indicator light changes from
being on to a flashing pattern
when the alarm system is set.
73
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
■Panic mode
■When the battery is disconnected
Be sure to cancel the alarm system.
If the battery is discharged before canceling the alarm, the system may be triggered
when the battery is reconnected.
When is pushed for longer than about
one second, the headlights/tail lights/emer-
gency flashers will flash, the front and rear
interior lights will come on, and an alarm will
sound for about 60 seconds to deter any
person from trying to break into or damage
your vehicle.
To stop the alarm, push any button on the
wireless remote control.
74
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Theft prevention labels (for USA)
These labels are attached to the
vehicle to reduce vehicle theft
by facilitating the tracing and
recovery of parts from stolen
vehicles. Do not remove under
penalty of law.
75
1
Before driving
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (P. 43 )
Adjust the position of the seat
forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (P. 4 3)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily opera-
ble.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(P. 56)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (P. 49)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(P. 50)
76
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■While driving
●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the
effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or
serious injury to the driver or passenger.
●Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and
stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment
mechanism may also be damaged.
■Adjusting the seat position:
●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are
not injured by the moving seat.
●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
77
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of
severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They
work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious
injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag/front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passen-
ger from impact with interior components.
Knee airbags
Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.
Side and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants and rear seat
outside occupants (if equipped).
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of outside occupants.
78
1-7. Safety information
Airbag system components
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system
controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The
driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The
front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant
classification sensor etc.
Front passenger airbag
Curtain shield airbags
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG
OFF indicator lights
Side airbags for the front pas-
sengers
Side and curtain shield airbag
sensors
Curtain shield airbag sensors
Side airbags for the rear out-
side passengers (if equipped)
SRS warning light
Driver airbag
Driver's seat position sensor
Knee airbags
Driver's seat belt buckle switch
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Occupant detection system
(ECU and sensors)
Front airbag sensors
79
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS air-
bag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sen-
sor assembly consists of a safing sensor and an airbag sensor.
In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system
triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-
pants.
■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
●Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)
SRS airbag.
●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as
well as the seats, and parts of the front pillar, rear pillar and roof side rail, may be
hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.
●The front windshield may crack.
■Operating conditions (front airbags)
●The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the
designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) col-
lision when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move
or deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
●It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehi-
cle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.
●The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger sitting
in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy if
luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is fastened, even if the seat is unoccu-
pied. (P. 88)
80
1-7. Safety information
■Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags)
●The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.
●The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if there is no passen-
ger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the side airbag on the passen-
ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(P. 88 )
■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a colli-
sion
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of
your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved
in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal colli-
sion. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of
the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.
●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
●Landing hard or vehicle falling
●Collision from the rear
●Collision from the side
●Vehicle rollover
81
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag
(side and curtain shield airbags)
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle
is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of
the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is
involved in a low-speed side collision.
●Collision from the side to the vehicle body
other than the passenger compartment
●Collision from the side at an angle
●Collision from the rear
●Collision from the front
●Vehicle rollover
82
1-7. Safety information
■When to contact your Lexus dealer
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not dis-
connect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.
●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
●The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause the
SRS airbags to inflate.
●A portion of the doors is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an
accident that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.
●The pad section of the steering wheel,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag
or lower portion of the instrument panel is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
●The portion of the containing the side air-
bag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
●The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars
or roof side rail garnishes (padding) con-
taining the curtain shield airbags inside is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-
aged.
83
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or
serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,
placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a
clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering
wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many driv-
ers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the
way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining
the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag
toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still main-
taining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
84
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can
cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the
airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with
the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.
●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seri-
ously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a
seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle
and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.
(P. 93)
●If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the driver's seat belt buckle but
the seat belt extender has not also been
fastened to the latch plate of the driver's
seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system
will judge that the driver is wearing the seat
belt even though the seat belt has not been
connected. In this case, the driver's airbag
may not activate correctly in a collision,
resulting in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
85
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean
against the dashboard.
●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the
SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on
the knees of a front passenger.
●Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or
passenger have items resting on their
knees.
●Do not lean against the door, the roof side
rail or the front, side and rear pillars.
●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the pas-
senger seat toward the door or put their
head or hands outside the vehicle.
86
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■SRS airbag precautions
●If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploys, be
sure to remove it.
●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags
inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag
components shown on P. 78.
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have
deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or
window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any
residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and
front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus
dealer.
●Do not attach anything to or lean anything
against areas such as the dashboard, steer-
ing wheel pad or lower portion of the
instrument panel.
These items can become projectiles when
SRS driver, front passenger and knee air-
bags deploy.
●Do not attach anything to areas such as the
door, windshield glass, side door glass,
front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist
grip.
87
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications with-
out consulting your Lexus dealer.
The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or
serious injury.
●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags
●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument
panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side
rails
●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant
compartment
●Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar
etc.)
●Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system
●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players
●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability
88
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys-
tem. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and
activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
AIR BAG OFF indicator light
AIR BAG ON indicator light
With navigation system
Without navigation system
89
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
■Adult*1
■Child *3 or child restraint system*4
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator
lights
AIR BAG ON
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Front passenger knee airbag
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator
lights
AIR BAG
OFF*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
90
1-7. Safety information
■Unoccupied
■There is a malfunction in the system
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller
adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator
lights Not illuminated
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator
lights
AIR BAG OFF
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated
Side airbag on the right side
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side
Activated
Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated
91
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
*4: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passen-
ger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (P. 93 )
*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 97)
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
●Wear the seat belt properly.
●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the
buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
●Make sure the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is not illuminated when using the
seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure
the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender
while the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag,
side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may not
activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of colli-
sion.
●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on
the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on
the seatback with their legs.
●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This
may cause the AIR BAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates
that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible
when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the
effectiveness of the seat belt system.
92
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIR BAG ON indicator light is illu-
minated. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn cor-
rectly. If the AIR BAG OFF indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the pas-
senger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger
seat fully rearward.
●When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
in the proper order. (P. 97)
●Do not modify or remove the front seats.
●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise,
the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection sys-
tem. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seat-
backs.
●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat
cushion surface.
●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
93
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much
safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
●Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the
child.
●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child
restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 97 )
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according
to the age and size of the child.
Infant seat
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of the Canada and all 50 states of the USA now require the use of
child restraint systems.
95
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Child restraint precautions
●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must
be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on
the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the wind-
shield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
●Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to
the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the
child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even
if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the
force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the
front passenger seat.
●A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front
passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as
possible even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front
passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
the child may be killed or seriously injured.
●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child
restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other
passengers in the event of collision.
●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side air-
bags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child
restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.
●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not
secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■When the child restraint system is not in use
●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or
store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
97
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using a seat belt or child restraint
lower anchorage. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (P. 50)
Child restraint lower anchor-
ages
Lower anchorages are pro-
vided for the outside rear seats.
(Buttons displaying the location
of the anchorages are attached
to the seats.)
Anchor bracket
(for top strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
98
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
seat facing the rear of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly in
order to activate the ALR lock
mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
99
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child seat down
into the rear seat, allow the shoul-
der belt to retract until the child
seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Forward facing Convertible seat
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the child
seat and insert the plate into the
buckle. Make sure that the belt is
not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt and
then allow it to retract slightly into
the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
100
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat is
securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Sit the child in the booster seat. Fit
the seat belt to the booster seat
according to the manufacturer's
instructions and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that the
belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is cor-
rectly positioned over the child's
shoulder, and that the lap belt is as
low as possible. (P. 5 0)
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the buckle release button
and fully retract the seat belt.
Installation with child restraint lower anchorages
Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.
Ty p e A
Latch the hooks of lower straps
onto the anchorages.
STEP 1
STEP 2
Canada only
102
1-7. Safety information
Type B
Latch the buckles onto the anchor-
ages.
If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto
the anchorages. (P. 1 02 )
For owners in Canada:
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower
connector system.
Child restraint systems with a top strap
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or a lower anchors, and
lock the head restraint in place at
the lowest position.
STEP 2
Canada only
STEP 1
103
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched.
STEP 2
■Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications
can be used.
This vehicle is designed to confirm to the SAE J1819.
CAUTION
■When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock
mode: (P. 52)
●ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort
to the child.
●Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or seri-
ous injured.
104
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix
the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passen-
gers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.
●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is posi-
tioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away
from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to
do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden
braking.
●Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.
●Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure.
●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufac-
turer.
●If the driver’s seat interferes with the child
restraint system and prevents it from being
attached correctly, attach the child restraint
system to the right-hand rear seat.
●Only put a forward facing or booster child
seat on the front seat when unavoidable.
When installing a forward facing or
booster child seat on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible
even if AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illu-
minated. Failing to do so may result in
death or serious injury if the airbags deploy
(inflate).
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt
will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.
■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages
When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around
the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make
sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious
injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
106
1-7. Safety information
When driving 2
107
2-1. Driving procedures ....... 108
Driving the vehicle................. 108
Engine (ignition) switch.......... 116
Automatic Transmission......... 119
Turn signal lever....................... 122
Parking brake........................... 123
2-2. Instrument cluster .......... 124
Gauges and meters................ 124
Indicators and warning
lights ......................................... 126
Multi-information display..... 130
2-3. Operating the lights and
windshield wipers......... 134
Headlight switch...................... 134
Fog light switch ........................ 137
Windshield wipers and
washer ..................................... 138
2-4. Using other driving
systems........................... 141
Cruise control........................... 141
Dynamic radar cruise
control..................................... 144
Intuitive parking assist........... 153
Driving assist systems............ 159
PCS
(Pre-Collision System) ........ 162
2-5. Driving information........ 165
Cargo and luggage ................ 165
Vehicle load limits................... 168
Winter driving tips................... 169
Trailer towing ............................ 175
Dinghy towing.......................... 182
108
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
Starting on a steep uphill
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving.
■Starting the engine (P. 1 1 7)
■Driving
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(P. 1 1 9)
Release the parking brake. (P. 123)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■Stopping
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the
shift lever to P or N. (P. 1 1 9 )
■Parking the vehicle
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (P. 123)
Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 11 9)
Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on
your person.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
109
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Driving in the rain
●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows
may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially
slippery.
●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing
the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■Breaking in your new Lexus
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to
observe:
●For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
●For the first 600 miles (1000 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake sys-
tem needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Lexus dealer perform the bed-
ding down.
■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the
correct fuel. (P. 41 2 )
■Normal characteristics after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation
leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
110
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When starting the vehicle
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.
This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■When driving the vehicle
●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator
pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will
result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in
operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle
only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals prop-
erly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal
using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an acci-
dent.
●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
●Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or
roll forward while the shift lever is in R.
Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering perfor-
mance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.
●If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check
that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver
drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
●Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to P, R or N while the vehicle
is moving.
Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission system and may result
in a loss of vehicle control.
●Do not shift the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the engine brake to not operate properly and lead to an
accident.
111
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
●Do not turn the engine off while driving.
The power steering and brake booster systems will not operate properly if the
engine is not running.
●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a
steep hill.
Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effec-
tiveness. (P. 1 1 9 )
●When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident.
●Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside
rear view mirrors while driving.
Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may
result in death or serious injury.
●Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are
not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do
not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability
tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and
possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on
your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■When driving on slippery road surfaces
●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce
your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
●Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-shifting
or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.
●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that
the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from
functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning
properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
112
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■When the vehicle is stopped
●Do not race the engine.
If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and
check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
●Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an
accident caused by the vehicle moving.
■When the vehicle is parked
●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehi-
cle when it is in the sun.
Failure to do so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic
material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of
the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical com-
ponents.
●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
●Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after
turning the engine off.
Doing so may cause burns.
●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is
snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running,
exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a seri-
ous health hazard.
113
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and odor-
less. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed area, such
as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to
death or a serious health hazard.
●The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by
corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehi-
cle inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer. Failure to do so may allow
exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.
■When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or
depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to engine
overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.
■When braking the vehicle
●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.
Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of
the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may
not securely hold the vehicle.
●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles
closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than
usual. Braking distance may also increase.
●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.
●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems
fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed
more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed
immediately.
114
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■While driving the vehicle
Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together
to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■When parking the vehicle
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the
vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.
■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long
time.
Doing so may damage the power steering pump
●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damag-
ing the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)
Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.
The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or
that of the brake discs are exceeded.
■If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
●The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 389)
115
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the
following serious damage to the vehicle.
●Engine stalling
●Short in electrical components
●Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to
have your Lexus dealer check the following.
●Brake function
●Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, transaxle fluid, etc.
●Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possible) and
the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
116
2-1. Driving procedures
Engine (ignition) switch
Modes can be switched by pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
when carrying the electronic key on your person. (The engine can be
started in any mode by operating the switch at the same time as depressing
the brake pedal.)
■Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
OFF*
Emergency flashers can be
used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can be
used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: The engine cannot be turned off
unless the shift lever is in P.
117
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 70 )
■When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer immediately.
■Auto power OFF function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the shift lever
in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.
■Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
118
2-1. Driving procedures
■Electronic key battery depletion
P. 28
■When the electronic key battery is discharged
P. 3 3 4
■Conditions affecting operation
P. 26
■Note for the entry function
P. 2 9
CAUTION
■When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelera-
tor pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, push and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving except in
an emergency. If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to
an unexpected accident.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■When starting the engine
●Do not race a cold engine.
●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
119
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic Transmission
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■Shifting the shift lever
While the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode, depress the brake
pedal and move the shift
lever.
■Shift position uses
*1: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the D
position for normal driving.
*2: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible
gear ranges, controls engine braking forces.
Shift position Function
PParking the vehicle or starting the engine
RReversing
NNeutral
DNormal driving*1
SS mode driving*2 (P. 1 2 0)
120
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode
Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is automatically set to 5 or 4 according to
vehicle speed.
■Shift ranges and their functions
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift
range.
Shift range Function
6Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
5Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 5
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 4
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 3
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 2
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1Setting the gear at 1.
121
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may some-
times be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even
when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will sound twice.)
■When driving with the cruise control system or dynamic radar cruise control sys-
tem
The engine brake will not operate in the S mode, even when downshifting to 5 or 4.
(P. 141, 144)
■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
P. 3 9 8
■If the indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
■AI-SHIFT (Artificial Intelligence Shift)
The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the
driver performance and driving conditions.
The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shift-
ing the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
122
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
■Turn signals can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.
Left turn
Right turn
Move and hold the lever part-
way to signal a lane change
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever part-
way to signal a lane change
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
123
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
NOTICE
■Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components over-
heating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.
Sets the parking brake*
(Depressing the pedal again
releases the parking brake.)
*: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal with your left foot while
depressing the brake pedal with
your right foot.
Canada USA
124
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
The following gauges, meters and display illuminate when the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Multi-information display
P. 130
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pushing and holding
the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being displayed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
125
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Brighter
Darker
When the headlight switch is
turned to ON, the brightness will
be reduced slightly unless the con-
trol dial is turned fully up.
Odometer and trip meter
●Odometer
Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
●Trip meter
Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was
last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display differ-
ent distances independently.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the engine and its components
●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indi-
cates the maximum engine speed.
●The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (H). In
this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after
it has cooled completely. (P. 4 0 5)
126
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center
panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.
Instrument cluster
The units used on the speedometer and the tachometer gauge display may
differ depending on the model/type.
127
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Center panel (without navigation system)
Center panel (with navigation system)
128
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehi-
cle’s various systems.
Turn signal indicator
(P. 122)
Cruise control indicator
(P. 141)
Headlight high beam indi-
cator (P. 13 4 )
(if equipped)
AFS OFF indicator light
(P. 135)
(USA)
Headlight indicator
(P. 13 4) Slip indicator (P. 1 59 )
(Canada)
Tail light indicator
(P. 13 4)
(without
navigation
system)
SRS airbag on-off indica-
tor (P. 88)
Front fog light indicator
(P. 137)
(with navi-
gation sys-
tem)
SRS airbag on-off indica-
tor (P. 88)
Shift position and shift range indica-
tors (P. 11 9)
*
*
*
*
129
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
CAUTION
■If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as ABS and SRS airbag warning lights not come
on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available
to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.
■Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions or suspected prob-
lem in any of the vehicle’s systems. (P. 364)
*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned
to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few sec-
onds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on,
or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
(USA) (Canada) (USA) (Canada)
(USA) (Canada)
(if equipped) (without
navigation
system)
(with naviga-
tion system)
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
130
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-
related data, including the current outside air temperature.
●Trip information (P. 13 1)
Displays driving range, fuel con-
sumption and other cruising
related information.
●Intuitive parking assist dis-
play (if equipped)
(P. 153)
Automatically displayed when
using intuitive parking assist.
●Dynamic radar cruise con-
trol display (if equipped)
(P. 144)
Automatically displayed when
using dynamic radar cruise con-
trol.
●Warning messages
(P. 375)
Automatically displayed when a
malfunction occurs in one of the
vehicle’s systems.
131
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Trip information
Type A
Display items can be switched by
pushing the DISP switch.
Type B
■Outside temperature
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed in the fol-
lowing range.
USA: from -40 to 122 °F
Canada: from -40 to 50 °C
132
2-2. Instrument cluster
■Driving range
■Average fuel consumption
■Average fuel consumption after refueling
■Current fuel consumption
■Average vehicle speed
Displays the estimated maximum distance that can
be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the DISP switch
for longer than one second when the average fuel con-
sumption is displayed.
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
vehicle was last refueled.
Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.
Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine
was started or the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pushing the DISP switch
for longer than one second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
133
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■System check display
After switching the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,
is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is
complete, is displayed before returning to the normal screen.
NOTICE
■The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal informa-
tion display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may
respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
134
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Headlight switch
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push the
lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams off.
Pull the lever toward you to turn
on the high beams.
Release to turn them off. You can
flash the high beams with the head-
lights on or off.
The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.
The side marker, parking,
tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights
turn on.
The headlights and all
lights listed above turn
on.
The headlights and park-
ing lights turn on and off
automatically.
(When the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
in IGNITION ON
mode)
USA
Canada
135
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
AFS (vehicles with discharge headlights)
AFS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) improves visibility at intersections
and on curves by automatically adjusting the direction of light axis of the
headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle
that are controlled by steering input.
Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
■Deactivating AFS
Turn the switch OFF to deactivate
AFS.
OFF
ON
■Daytime running light system
To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automati-
cally (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake
is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.
■Headlight control sensor
The sensor may not function properly if an
object is placed on the sensor, or anything
that blocks the sensor is affixed to the wind-
shield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting
the level of ambient light and may cause the
automatic headlight control system to mal-
function.
136
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■Automatic light off system
●When the headlights come on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds
after all doors are closed with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch switched to
ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF. (The light turns off immediately if
the button on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)
●When only the tail lights come on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode or turned OFF and
driver’s door is opened.
To turn the lights on again, switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the light switch
OFF once and then back to the or position.
■Automatic headlight leveling system (vehicles with discharge headlights)
The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of
passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do
not interfere with other road users.
■If the indicator flashes... (vehicles with discharge headlights)
It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (Customizable features P.
435)
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
137
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
Fog light switch
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain
or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.
OFF
Fog lights ON
138
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
■Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped)
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when
INT is selected).
Intermittent windshield wiper
interval increases
Intermittent windshield wiper
interval decreases
Intermittent windshield wiper
operation (INT)
Low speed windshield wiper
operation (LO)
High speed windshield wiper
operation (HI)
Temporary operation (MIST)
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
139
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
2
When driving
■The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped)
With AUTO selected, the wipers will operate automatically when
the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts
wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.
Sensor sensitivity (-)
With AUTO selected, wiper
response to falling rain is less
sensitive.
Sensor sensitivity (+)
With AUTO selected, wiper
response to falling rain is more
sensitive.
Rain-sensing windshield
wiper operation (AUTO)
Low speed windshield wiper
operation (LO)
High speed windshield wiper
operation (HI)
Temporary operation (MIST)
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
(With AUTO selected, after
operating several times, the wip-
ers operate one more time after
a short delay to prevent drip-
ping.)
140
2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers
■Rain drop sensor (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)
■AUTO mode
If the wiper switch is turned to AUTO position while the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate once to show that AUTO
mode is activated.
■If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the wind-
shield washer fluid reservoir.
CAUTION
■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in AUTO mode (vehicles
equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)
The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the
windshield is subject to vibration in AUTO mode. Take care that your fingers or any-
thing else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.
NOTICE
■When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you
and held continually.
The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.
141
2
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control (if equipped)
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelera-
tor.
■Set the vehicle speed
Turn the ON-OFF button ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate to the
desired speed and press the
lever down to set the cruise
control speed.
■Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
Hold the lever until the desired
speed setting is obtained.
STEP 1
STEP 2
142
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Fine adjustment of the set speed
Fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/h]) can be made
by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.
■Cruise control can be set when
●The shift lever is in the D or 4,5, or 6 range of S.
●Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph
(200 km/h).
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
■Automatic cruise control cancellation
The set speed is automatically cancelled in any of the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40km/h)
●VSC is activated
■Canceling and resuming regular acceleration
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
143
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Turn the ON-OFF button off once, and then reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately
after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
●On steep hills
●On winding roads
144
2-4. Using other driving systems
Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)
Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control
with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates
in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead.
■Select cruise mode
Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance control mode
Turn the ON-OFF button
ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
Selecting conventional con-
stant speed control mode
Turn the ON-OFF button
ON.
Push the button once more to
deactivate.
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-
trol mode is always reset when
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is switched to IGNITION
ON mode.
Switch to constant speed
control mode.
(push and hold for approxi-
mately one second)
145
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Driving in the selected cruise control mode
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed and
press the lever down to set.
■Adjusting the speed setting
Increase speed
Decrease speed
To change the set speed, oper-
ate the lever until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Fine Adjustment (1 mph incre-
ments)
Momentarily move lever in
desired direction and release
Coarse adjustment (5 mph
increments)
Hold the lever in the desired
direction. Coarse adjustment
will continue to change the set
speed approximately 5 mph per
second until the lever is
released.
146
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Canceling and resuming the speed setting
Cancel
Push the lever towards you to
cancel cruise control.
The setting is also canceled
when the brakes are applied.
Resume
To resume cruise control and
return to the set speed, push the
lever up.
■Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Each push of the switch changes
the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long
Medium
Short
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance
is automatically set to the long
mode when the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is
switched to IGNITION ON
mode.
A mark will be displayed to indi-
cate the presence of the vehicle
if a vehicle is running ahead of
you.
Preceding
vehicle mark
147
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles
within 328 ft. (100 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your
vehicle and those vehicles.
Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long down-
hill slopes.
Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles
ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)
The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehi-
cle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance
switch.
Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving
slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph
(100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the sys-
tem automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in
vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone
warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your
vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.
148
2-4. Using other driving systems
Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower
than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and
the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)
The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the
speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-
tance set by the driver.
Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving
slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to
62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/
h) is out of the lane
When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly
accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to
fixed speed cruising.
■Fine adjustment of the set speed
Adjustment of the set speed by the following speed can be made by lightly pressing
the lever up or down and releasing it.
In the constant speed control mode: Approximately 1.0 mph (1.6 km/h)
In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:
USA: Approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
Canada:Approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)
■Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers
Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or
to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (P. 375)
■The dynamic radar cruise can be set when
●The shift lever is in D or the 4, 5 or 6 range of S.
●Vehicle speed is between approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) and 85 mph (135
km/h).
■Accelerating
The vehicle can be accelerated normally.
149
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the follow-
ing situations.
●Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●VSC is activated
●The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way.*
●The windshield wipers are operating at high speed.*
*: Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the ON-OFF
button on again.
If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other
reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.
■Automatically cancelling constant speed control
The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations.
●Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle
speed
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
●Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h)
●VSC is activated
■Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings
Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond
to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/
decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.
Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
Long Approximately 210 ft. (65 m)
Medium Approximately 150 ft. (45 m)
Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)
150
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Radar sensor and grille cover
Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic
objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.
■Certification
For vehicles sold in USA
For vehicles sold in Canada
Grille cover
Radar sensor
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF exposure information
This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
151
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Before using dynamic radar cruise control
Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.
Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not
appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle
and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.
■To avoid inadvertent cruise control activation
Keep the ON-OFF button off when not in use.
■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control
Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or
fatal accident.
●In heavy traffic
●On roads with sharp bends
●On winding roads
●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow.
●Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients
●At entrances to expressways
●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors
from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.)
●Where buzzer can be heard often
152
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead
Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in
front of you.
As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the prox-
imity alarm (P. 375) will not be activated, and an accident may result.
●Vehicles that cut in suddenly
●Vehicles traveling at low speeds
●Vehicles that are not moving
●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)
●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane
■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function
correctly
Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may
not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.
●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the function-
ing of the sensor
●When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk, etc.)
●When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow
●When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable
■To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly
Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sen-
sor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.
●Stick or attach anything to them
●Leave them dirty
●Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks
●Modify or paint them
●Replace them with non-genuine parts
153
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)
The distance to obstacles measured by the sensors is communicated via
the multi-information display and a buzzer when parallel parking or
maneuvering into a garage. Always check the surrounding area when
using this system.
For vehicles equipped with a navigation system, refer to the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” for further details.
■Types of sensors
Front corner sensors
Rear corner sensors
Back sensors
■Multi-information display (P. 13 0 )
Front corner sensor opera-
tion
Rear corner sensor operation
Back sensor operation
154
2-4. Using other driving systems
The display and buzzer system
■Corner sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approxi-
mately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm) to
1.2 ft. (37.5 cm) from the obsta-
cle
Approximately 1.2 ft. (37.5 cm)
to 0.8 ft. (25 cm) from the
obstacle
Flashing: Within 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
of the obstacle
■Intuitive parking assist switch
ON/OFF
When ON, an indicator on the
switch comes on to inform the
driver that the function is opera-
tional.
155
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Back sensor operation display and distance to an obstacle
The system operates when the vehicle approaches within approxi-
mately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) of an obstacle.
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm) to
2.0 ft. (60 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm) to
1.5 ft. (45 cm) from the obstacle
Approximately 1.5 ft. (45 cm) to
1.2 ft. (35 cm) from the obstacle
Flashing: Within 1.2 ft. (35 cm) of
the obstacle
■Buzzer operation and distance to the obstacle
A buzzer sounds when the corner sensors and back sensor are oper-
ating.
●The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obsta-
cle, the buzzer sounds continuously.
•Corner sensors: Approximately 0.8 ft. (25 cm)
• Back sensors: Approximately 1.2 ft. (35 cm)
●When two or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the
buzzer system responds to the nearest obstacle.
●If multiple obstacles are detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) in front and
behind the vehicle at the same time, the warning buzzer will change
in the following manner:
• If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detected
near a different area of the vehicle, the warning buzzer will sound
6 beeps then one continuous beep.
• If a continuous beep is sounding, and a new obstacle is detected
within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warn-
ing buzzer will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep.
156
2-4. Using other driving systems
Detection range of the sensors
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
The diagram shows the detection
range of the sensors. Note that the
sensors cannot detect obstacles
that are extremely close to the
vehicle.
The range of the sensors may
change depending on the shape of
the object etc.
157
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■Sensor detection information
●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.
• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor.
• The sensor is frozen.
• The sensor is covered in any way.
• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.
• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass
• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines,
air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.
• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.
• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain
• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.
• Towing eyelets are installed.
• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.
• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.
• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather
In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be closer than they
are.
●The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay particu-
lar attention to the following obstacles.
• Wires, fences, ropes etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb radio waves
• Sharply-angled objects
•Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your
vehicle
158
2-4. Using other driving systems
■When the display flashes and a message is displayed
P. 375
■Certification (Canada only)
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 4 35 )
CAUTION
■Caution when using the intuitive parking assist
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possi-
bly cause an accident.
●Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
●Do not attach any accessories within the sensor range.
NOTICE
■Notes when washing the vehicle
Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.
Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
159
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving assist systems
When the VSC and TRAC systems are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping, or if the front wheels spin, the
slip indicator light flashes to indi-
cate that the VSC and TRAC sys-
tems have been engaged.
A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to
indicate that VSC is operating.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems
operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware,
however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied
upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface
■Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on
slippery road surfaces.
■TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning when
starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
P. 162
160
2-4. Using other driving systems
■Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC systems
●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that
a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operat-
ing. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.
CAUTION
Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or
serious injury:
■The ABS does not operate effectively when
●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.
●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.
■Stopping distance when the ABS is operating will exceed that of normal condi-
tions
The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always main-
tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.
●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
●When driving with tire chains
●When driving over bumps in the road
●When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven roads
■TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road
surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
161
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
CAUTION
■When the slip indicator flashes and a warning buzzer sounds
This situation occurs immediately while VSC is activated. Always drive carefully.
Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indica-
tor light flashes and a buzzer sounds.
■Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load
capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire
pressure level.
The ABS and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on
the vehicle.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.
162
2-4. Using other driving systems
PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)
Radar sensor
Detects vehicles or other obsta-
cles on or near the road ahead and
determines whether a collision is
imminent based on the position,
speed, and heading of the obsta-
cles.
Grille cover
Radar sensor
Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically
engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle dam-
age when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision.
■Pre-collision seat belts
The front seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the preten-
sioner is increased (P. 51), to provide even greater constraining force to
protect the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skid-
ding, the system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected.
■Pre-collision brake assist
Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is
depressed.
■Obstacles not detected
The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occa-
sions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles,
trees, or snowdrifts.
163
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■The pre-collision system is operational when
●Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)
• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming
vehicle exceeds 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Seat belts (linked to brake operation)
• Vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).
• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.
• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.
●Brake Assist
• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).
• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or the vehicle is
greater than 18 to 24 mph (30 to 40 km/h).
• The brake pedal is depressed.
■Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision
●When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve
●When driving over a narrow iron bridge
●When there is a metal object on the road surface
●When driving on an uneven road surface
●When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn
●When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front
When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possi-
bility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force
greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the
vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.
■When there is a malfunction in the system
Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (P. 364, 375)
164
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■Handling the radar sensor
Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.
●Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.
Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage
them.
●Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.
If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the
sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area
inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.
●Do not disassemble the sensor.
●Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille guard or surrounding
area.
■Limitations of the pre-collision system
Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe
your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.
165
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (1505) = 650
lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo
capacity and load.
●Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
●Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
●For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
166
2-5. Driving information
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle. (P. 175)
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding
in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 900 lb. (410 kg), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
900 lb. — 366 lb. = 534 lb. (410 kg —166 kg = 244 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.
(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as fol-
lows:
534 lb. — 388 lb. = 146 lb. (244 kg — 176 kg = 68 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases,
the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occu-
pants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the
number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (com-
bined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must
reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle. (P. 16 8 )
167
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■Storage precautions
●Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback.
Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during
sudden braking or in an accident.
●Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp accelera-
tion or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident
they may injure the vehicle occupants.
●Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure some-
one during an accident or sudden braking.
■Capacity and distribution
●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.
●Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total
load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which
may cause death or serious injury.
168
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
■Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.
(P. 3 26)
CAUTION
■Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking
ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing
capacity and cargo capacity.
■Total load capacity: 900 lb. (410 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and
luggage.
■Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose esti-
mated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■Towing capacity: 1000 lb. (450 kg)
■Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and
the number of occupants.
169
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the
vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the
prevailing weather conditions.
■Pre-winter preparations
●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tempera-
tures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
●Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of
battery electrolyte.
●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of
tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match
the size of the tires.
●Tire inflation pressure falls in winter as the outside temperature
falls. Add 2.9 to 4.3 psi (20 to 30 kPa, 0.2 to 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)
to the standard tire inflation pressure.
170
2-5. Driving information
■Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is fro-
zen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe
away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in
front of the windshield.
●Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
●Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that
may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes.
■When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable
to road conditions.
■When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the
parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released.
171
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Selecting snow chains
Use the correct snow chain size when mounting the snow chains. Chain
size is regulated for each tire sizes.
Side chain
0.12 in. [3 mm] in diameter
1.18 in. [30 mm] in length
0.39 in. [10 mm] in width
Cross chain
0.16 in. [4 mm] in diameter
0.98 in. [25 mm] in length
0.55 in. [14 mm] in width
Regulations on the use of snow chains
●Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location
and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing
chains.
●Install the chains on the front tires.
●Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
172
2-5. Driving information
Shifting the windshield wiper position
You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow or
icy condition etc.)
Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper
position.
To rest position
Raise the wiper in line with the
windshield.
You can stand the wipers up for the
rest position.
*: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)
To retract position
Lower the wipers by pressing on
the upper part of the hook section.
173
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
●Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear tires.
●Install the tire chains on front tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after
driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
●Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
instructions.
CAUTION
■Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious
injury.
●Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires
being used.
●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■Driving with snow chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may
cause death or serious injury.
●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used,
or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
●Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle
handling.
●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is
maintained.
174
2-5. Driving information
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers or legiti-
mate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when
tire chains are fitted.
175
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-carrying vehicle, thus
towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, performance, brak-
ing, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of oth-
ers, do not overload the vehicle or trailer.
Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing
a trailer for commercial purposes
■Weight limits
Confirm the total trailer weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
■Gross vehicle weight
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the Certification Label. The gross
vehicle weight is the sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load. Also included is the
weight of any special equipment installed on your vehicle.
■Gross axle weight
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.
Certification label
176
2-5. Driving information
Towing a trailer
Consult your Lexus dealer for further information on additional require-
ments such as a towing kits, etc.
■Trailer tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the total trailer weight, not exceeding the maximum
100 lb. (45 kg). (Tongue load / Total trailer weight x 100 = 9 to 11%)
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with plat-
form scales found at a highway weighing stations, building supply
company, trucking company, junk yards, etc.
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
177
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■Before towing
●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (P. 326)
●Trailer tires should be inflated according to the trailer manufacturer's recom-
mendation.
●All trailer lights work to be legal.
●Confirm all lights work each time you connect them.
●Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle is not level, and check for improper tongue
load, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
●Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded.
●Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal, state/provincial or
local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing
purposes.
■Break-in schedule
Lexus recommends that you do not use a new vehicle or a vehicle with any new
power train components (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearings, etc.) to
tow a trailer for the first 500 miles (800 km) of driving.
■Maintenance
●If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to
the additional load. (See “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Sup-
plement/ Scheduled Maintenance”.)
●Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately
600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
CAUTION
■To avoid accident or injury
●The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus the weight of cargo) must not exceed
1000 lb. (450 kg).
●Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue load capacities.
●Never load more weight in the back than in the front of the trailer. About 60% of
the load should be in the front half of the trailer, and the remaining 40% in the
rear.
178
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■Hitches
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch
manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a
higher weight, the operator must never exceed the maximum weight rating speci-
fied for the trailer hitch.
●If you wish to install a trailer hitch, your Lexus dealer should be consulted.
●Use only a hitch that conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
●Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
●Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing
the hitch, seal any mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any sub-
stances into the vehicle.
■When towing a trailer
●Never tap into your vehicle's hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle's
braking effectiveness.
●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the
trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is
danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
■When installing a trailer hitch
●Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the
trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
●Do not use axle-mounted hitches, as they can cause damage to the axle housing,
wheel bearings, wheels or tires.
■Brakes
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and
state/provincial regulations.
179
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. The three main
causes of vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and
improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when towing.
●Before starting out, check the trailer’s lights and the vehicle-trailer
connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
●Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an
area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the
vehicle.
●Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to
move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the
trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing without a
trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have someone
guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an accident.
●As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
NOTICE
■Safety chain
A safety chain must always be used between the towing vehicle and the trailer.
Leave sufficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain should cross under the trailer
tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to the ground in the case that it
becomes damaged or separated. For the correct safety chain installation proce-
dure, ask your Lexus dealer.
■Do not directly splice trailer lights
Directly splicing may damage your vehicle's electrical system and cause a malfunc-
tion.
180
2-5. Driving information
●Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss
of control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.
●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
●Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a
turn.
●Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a
larger than normal turning radius.
●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling of your
vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Periodically check the rear to prepare
for being passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your vehi-
cle and trailer to sway. If swaying occurs, firmly grip the steering wheel,
reduce speed immediately but gradually, and steer straight ahead.
Never increase speed. If you make no extreme correction with the
steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
●Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your
trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.
●In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical charging
performance, do not use overdrive. Transmission shift range position
must be in “4”, in the “S” mode.
●Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle's engine may over-
heat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up
a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in use),
pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot. See “If you vehicle
overheats”. (P. 405)
181
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and the trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the
transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so
only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and
trailer wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
●When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in the “P” position, start the engine. Be sure
to keep the brake pedal pressed.
Shift into “3”, “2”, “1”, or the “R” position (if reversing).
Release the parking brake and brake pedal, and slowly pull or
back away from the wheel blocks.
Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
■To avoid an accident
●Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h) or posted towing speed limit, whichever is
lower. As instability (swaying) of the towing vehicle-trailer combination increases
as speed increases, exceeding 45 mph (72 km/h) may cause loss of control.
●Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do
not make sudden downshifts.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently. This could cause
the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
182
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the
ground) behind a motor home.
Interior features 3
183
3-1. Using the air
conditioning system
and defogger ............... 184
Automatic air conditioning
system...................................... 184
Rear window and outside
rear view mirror
defoggers ................................ 191
3-2. Using the audio
system............................ 192
Audio system type................... 192
Using the radio......................... 194
Using the CD player .............. 201
Playing back MP3 and
WMA discs............................ 207
Optimal use of the audio
system...................................... 215
Using the AUX adapter........ 218
Using the steering wheel
audio switches....................... 219
3-3. Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone) ...... 221
Hands-free phone
system features
(for cellular phone) .............. 221
Using the hands-free
phone system
(for cellular phone) ............. 224
Making a phone call ............. 232
Setting a cellular phone ....... 236
Security and system
setup........................................ 240
Using the phone book .......... 243
3-4. Using the interior
lights............................. 249
Interior lights list .................... 249
• Front interior lights.............. 251
• Personal lights ...................... 251
3-5. Using the storage
features ........................ 252
List of storage features......... 252
• Glove box.............................. 252
• Console box ......................... 253
• Overhead console.............. 255
• Cup holders.......................... 256
• Auxiliary box ........................ 258
3-6. Other interior
features ........................ 259
Sun visors ................................. 259
Vanity mirror ........................... 260
Clock........................................... 261
Ashtray ..................................... 262
Cigarette lighter.................... 263
Power outlet ............................ 264
Seat heaters and
ventilators ............................. 265
Armrest ..................................... 267
Rear sunshade ........................ 268
Extended trunk....................... 270
Floor mat .................................... 271
Trunk features......................... 272
Garage door opener ............. 274
Compass ................................... 279
184
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets
and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Press to switch to automatic mode.
Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated
air modes.
Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tempera-
ture setting.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the
“Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
Automatic mode
Driver’s side temperature
setting display
Changes the air outlets used
Off
Fan speed
Airflow display
Fan speed display
Passenger’s side
temperature
setting display
Driver's side
temperature control
Air conditioning
ON/OFF switch
Outside air or
recirculated air mode
Front windshield defogger
Passenger’s side
temperature control
Dual operation switch
STEP 1
STEP 2
185
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tem-
perature on the switch.
The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set sepa-
rately.
Adjusting the settings
■Adjusting the temperature setting
Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tempera-
ture on the switch.
Press (increase) or (decrease) on the switch to separately adjust
the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Press
to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same set-
ting (simultaneous mode).
The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous
modes each time is pressed.
■Adjusting the fan speed
Press (increase) or (decrease) on .
Press to turn the fan off.
STEP 3
186
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■Changing the air outlets
Press or on the
switch.
The air outlets switch each time the
switch is pressed.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
Air flows to the feet.
Air flows to the feet and the
front windshield defogger oper-
ates.
■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Press .
The mode switches between (recycles air inside the vehicle),
AUTO and (introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each
time the switch is pressed.
When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning
system operates automatically.
187
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Defogging the front windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system control
operates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return to
recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode
Press for 2 or more sec-
onds.
Press (increase) or (decrease)
on the switch.
From —3 (low) to 3 (high) can be
set.
STEP 1
STEP 2
188
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Front outlets (right and left side)
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent
Rear outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down
Turn the knob up to open the
vent and down to close the vent
189
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and
ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
●The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest
temperature setting is selected in summer.
●Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm
or cool air is ready to flow.
●Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.
■Using the system in recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an
extended period.
■Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to (outside air) mode in sit-
uations where the windows need to be defogged.
■Outside air temperature approaches 32F (0C).
The air conditioning system may not operate even when is pressed.
■When the indicator light on flashes
Press and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once
more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light
continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your
Lexus dealer.
■Automatic mode for air intake control
In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and auto-
matically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.
CAUTION
■To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The dif-
ference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can
cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
190
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when
the engine is stopped.
191
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
CAUTION
■When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on
Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirror, as it can become very hot
and burn you.
These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove rain-
drops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.
Without navigation system
ON/OFF
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient tem-
perature and vehicle speed.
With navigation system
ON/OFF
The defoggers will automatically
turn off after 15 to 60 minutes.
The operation time changes
according to the ambient tem-
perature and vehicle speed.
192
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system type
■Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is
being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.
With navigation system
Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to
the “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.
Without navigation system
CD player with changer and AM/FM radio
Tit le Page
Using the radio P. 1 94
Using the CD player P. 20 1
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 2 07
Optimal use of the audio system P. 21 5
Using the AUX adapter P. 218
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 2 1 9
193
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■For vehicles sold in USA and Canada
●Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s
authority to operate this device.
●Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the
surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain
inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any
of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
■To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.
■To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
194
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Setting station presets (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
Search for desired stations by turning the or pressing or
on .
Press and hold the switch (from to ) the station is to be
set to, and you hear a beep.
Scanning radio stations (excluding XM® Satellite Radio)
■Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press the switch once again.
Seeking any
traffic program
station
Station
selector Displays radio text messages
Power Volume
Scans for receivable stations
Seeking the
frequency Changing the program types
Adjusting the
frequency (AM,
FM mode) or
channel
(SAT mode)
AMSAT/FM
mode buttons
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
195
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Scanning all radio stations within range
Press .
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press the switch once again.
RDS (Radio Data System)
This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information
and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which
broadcast this information.
■Receiving RDS broadcasts
Press or on during FM reception.
The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.
●ROCK
●EASY LIS (Easy listening)
●CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
●R & B (Rhythm and Blues)
●INFORM (Information)
●RELIGION
●MISC (Miscellaneous)
●ALERT (Emergency messages)
If the system receives no RDS stations, NO PTY appears on the display.
Press , or or on .
The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type.
■Displaying radio station names
Press .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
196
3-2. Using the audio system
■Displaying radio text messages
Press twice.
If MSG shows in the display, a text message will be displayed.
If the text continues past the end of the display, is displayed. Press and
hold until you hear a beep.
XM® Satellite Radio (If equipped)
■Receiving XM® Satellite Radio
Press and hold until SAT shows in the display.
The display changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
AM SAT1 SAT2 SAT3
Turn to select the desired channel in the all categories or
press or on to select the desired channel in
the current category.
■Setting XM® Satellite Radio channel presets
Select the desired channel. Press the button the channel is to be set to
(from to ), and you hear a beep.
■Changing the channel category
Press or on the switch.
■Scanning XM® Satellite Radio channels
●Scanning channels in the current category
Press .
When the desired channel is reached, press the switch
again.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
197
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●Scanning preset channels
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
When the desired channel is reached, press the switch
again.
■Displaying text information
Press .
The display will show up to 10 characters.
The display changes as follows each time the button is pressed.
●CH NAME
●TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE)
●NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE)
●CH NUMBER
STEP 1
STEP 2
198
3-2. Using the audio system
■When the battery is disconnected
Stations presets are erased.
■Reception sensitivity
●Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually
changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding
objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.
●The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio
reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the
antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
■XM® Satellite Radio
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts pro-
vided under a separate subscription. Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
states and 10 Canadian provinces.
●XM® subscriptions
For detailed information about XM® Satellite Radio or to subscribe:
U.S.A.
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.
Canada
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677.
●Radio ID
You will need the radio ID when activating XM® service or reporting a prob-
lem. Select “CH000” using , and the receiver's 8-character ID number
will appear.
●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompany-
ing Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.
*: Terms and services provided by XM® Satellite Radio are subject to change with-
out notice.
199
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■If the satellite radio does not operate normally
If a problem occurs with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether
the XM® antenna cable is attached securely.
There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surround-
ing antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.
UPDATING
You have not subscribed to the XM® Satellite Radio.
The radio is being updated with the latest encryption
code. Contact the XM® Satellite Radio for subscrip-
tion information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized.
Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the
previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel. If you want to lis-
ten to the premium channel, contact the XM® Satellite
Radio.
NO SIGNAL
The XM® signal is too weak at the current location.
Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stron-
ger signal.
LOADING The unit is acquiring audio or program information.
Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR The channel you selected is not broadcasting any pro-
gramming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature
associated with the channel at that time. No action
needed.
200
3-2. Using the audio system
Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-
438-9677 (Canada).
■Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:
●Reorienting or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
●Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
---
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait
for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previ-
ous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change auto-
matically, select another channel.
201
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the CD player
Loading CDs
■Loading a CD
Push .
WAIT is shown on the display.
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from WAIT to LOAD.
■Loading multiple CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
WAIT is shown on the display.
Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to
green.
The display changes from WAIT to LOAD.
The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.
Power Volume
Selecting a track
CD eject
Playback
Search playback
CD insert
Selecting a CD
Random playback
Repeat play
Displays text
message
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
202
3-2. Using the audio system
Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from
amber to green again.
Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.
To stop the operation, press .
Ejecting CDs
■Ejecting a CD
To select the CD to be ejected,
press or on .
The number of the CD selected is
shown on the display.
Press and remove the CD.
■Ejecting all the CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep, and then remove the CDs.
Selecting, fast-forwarding, rewinding, and scanning tracks
■Selecting a track
Press to move up and to move down using until the
desired track number is displayed.
To fast forward or rewind, press and hold or on .
■Scanning a CD
Press .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
Press the switch again when the desired track is reached.
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
203
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a CD
■To select a CD to play
To select the desired CD, press or on .
■To scan loaded CDs
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.
Press the switch again when the desired CD is reached.
Repeat play
■To repeat a track
Press (RPT).
■To repeat all of the tracks on a CD
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■Current CD
Press (RAND).
Tracks are played in random order until random playback is canceled.
■All CDs
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in a random order until the switch is
pressed once more.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track no./
Elapsed time CD title Track name.
STEP 1
STEP 2
204
3-2. Using the audio system
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press (RAND), (RPT), or again.
■When LOAD, ERROR or WAIT is shown on the display
LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
ERROR: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
WAIT: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for
a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still
cannot be played back.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected.
■If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
205
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
206
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the CDs or
the player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
207
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
Refer to the section entitled “Using the CD player” for details. (P. 201)
Selecting a folder
■Selecting folders one at a time
Press () or () to select the desired folder.
■Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep. When the desired folder is
reached, press the switch once again.
■Returning to the first folder
Press and hold () until you hear a beep.
Power Volume
Selecting a file
CD eject
Playback
Search playback
CD insert
Selecting a CD
Random playback
Repeat play
Displays text
message
Selecting a file
Selecting a folder
208
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting and scanning files
■Selecting 1 file at a time
Turn the or press or on to select the desired
file.
■Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press .
When the desired file is reached, press the switch once again.
Repeat play
■To repeat a file
Press (RPT).
Folder repeat
■To repeat all of the files on a folder
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
Random playback
■To play files from a particular folder in random order
Press (RAND).
■To play all of the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
Switching the display
Press .
Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of Folder
no./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name Album title (MP3
only) Track title Artist name.
209
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Canceling random, repeat and scan playback
Press (RAND), (RPT), or again.
■When LOAD, ERROR or WAIT is shown on the display.
LOAD: This indicates that the CD player has completed loading the CD.
ERROR: This indicates is a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The CD
may be dirty, damaged, or inserted up-side down.
WAIT: Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player. Wait for
a while and then press . Contact your Lexus dealer if the CD still
cannot be played back.
NO MUSIC: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the CD.
■Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc features, or
due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
■CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a
problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended peri-
ods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
210
3-2. Using the audio system
■MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3
compression.
WMA (Windows Media TMAudio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.
●MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)
* Compatible with VBR
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural
●WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
*Only compatible with 2-channel playback
●Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the
CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc
is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
211
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
●Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may
not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be dis-
played correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
●File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with
the extension .mp3 or .wma.
●Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs
that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.
●ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title
and artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The
number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track
title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
212
3-2. Using the audio system
●MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any
files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot
be played.
●Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA
files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This
may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.
●Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of
128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depend-
ing on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3
and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding
and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may
result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be
possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the USA and other countries.
213
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual Disc.
Doing so may damage the CD player and render the CD insert/eject function
unusable.
●CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.
(12 cm)
●Low-quality and deformed CDs
●CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
●CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have had
the label peeled off
214
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the CDs or the
player itself.
●Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
●Do not apply oil to the CD player.
●Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
●Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
●Do not insert more than one CD at a time.
215
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Optimal use of the audio system
Using the AUDIO CONTROL function
■Changing modes
Pressing selects the mode to be change in the following order.
POSBASMIDTREFADBALASL
Displays the current mode.
Changes the following set-
ting.
• Listening position (P. 21 6)
The sound feel setting can be
changed to produce the best
sound for each listening posi-
tion.
• Sound quality and volume
balance (P. 216)
The sound quality and balance
setting can be changed to pro-
duce the best sound.
• Automatic Sound Levelizer
ON/OFF (P. 217)
216
3-2. Using the audio system
■Changing the listening position
Turning changes the position in the following order.
■Adjusting sound quality
Turning adjusts the level.
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or CD
mode.
Display Listening position
DRIVER Position best suited to the driver’s seat
FRONT Position best suited to the driver’s and front passenger
seats
REAR Position best suited to the rear seats
ALL Position best suited to all seats
Sound qual-
ity mode
Mode
displayed Level Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
Bass*BAS -5 to 5
Low HighMid-range*MID -5 to 5
Tr e b l e *TRE -5 to 5
Front/rear
volume
balance
FAD F7 to R7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front
Left/right
volume
balance
BAL L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
217
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
Turning to the right turns ON the ASL, and turning to the
left turns OFF the ASL.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise
level as you drive your vehicle.
218
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the AUX adapter
■Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other adjust-
ments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable audio
device.
This adapter can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it
through the vehicle’s speakers.
Connect the portable audio
device.
Press .
STEP 1
STEP 2
219
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the steering wheel audio switches
Turning on the power
Press when the audio system is turned OFF.
The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down for a few sec-
ond.
Changing the audio source
Press when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source
changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.
FM1FM2CD changerAUXAMSAT1SAT2SAT3
Adjusting the volume
Press + on to increase the volume and - to decrease the volume.
Hold down the switch to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering
wheel.
Power on, select audio
source
Volume
Radio: Select radio stations
CD: Select tracks, files (MP3
and WMA) and discs
220
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a radio station
Press to select the radio mode.
Press or on the switch to select a radio station.
To seek for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear
a beep.
Selecting a track/file
Press to select the CD mode.
Press or on the switch to select the desired track/file.
Selecting a disc in the CD player
Press to select the CD mode.
Press and hold or on switch until a beep is heard.
CAUTION
■To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
221
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Hands-free phone system features (for cellular phone) (if equipped)
■Conditions affecting operation
The hands-free phone system may not operate normally in the following situations:
●The cellular phone is turned off, or located outside the service area.
●The cellular phone has a low battery.
●The cellular phone is not connected to the system.
●The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box, or metal material cov-
ers or touches the phone.
■When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent the personal data from being improperly
accessed.
■Required profiles for the cellular phone
●HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
●OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
■Trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
This system supports Bluetooth®, which allows you to make or receive calls
without using cables to connect a cellular phone and the system, and with-
out operating the cellular phone.
Tit le Page
Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular
phone) P. 2 24
Making a phone call P. 232
Setting a cellular phone P. 236
Security and system setup P. 24 0
Using the phone book P. 243
222
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Certification for the hands-free phone system
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
●Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A
IC ID: 1551A-BTAU01A
MADE IN JAPAN
223
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
CAUTION:
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth, for uncon-
trolled equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in
Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it
is desirable that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and more
between the radiator and person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet
and legs).
Co-location:
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Do not use a cellular phone, or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to a cellular phone
Do not leave a cellular phone in the vehicle. The temperature inside may become
high resulting in damage to the phone.
224
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Audio unit
Displays such items as mes-
sage, name, and phone num-
ber
Lower-case characters and
special characters, such as an
umlaut, cannot be displayed.
Push and hold: Displays infor-
mation that is too long to be
displayed at one time on the
screen
Selects speed dials
Selects items such as menu
or number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Displays the reception level
Displays Bluetooth® connec-
tion condition
If BT is not displayed, the
hands-free phone system
cannot be used.
225
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Steering wheel
Volume
The voice guidance volume
cannot be adjusted by using
this button.
Hands-free phone system
ON/starts a call
Hands-free phone system
OFF/ends a call/refuses a call
Press: Voice command sys-
tem ON
Press and hold: Voice com-
mand system OFF
■Microphone
226
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Operating the system by using a voice command
By following voice guidance instructions output from the speaker, voice
commands can be given to allow for operation of the hands-free phone
system without checking the display or operating .
■Operation procedure when using a voice command
Press and say a command for a desired function.
(P. 228)
■Auxiliary commands when using a voice command
The following auxiliary commands can be used when operating the
system using a voice command:
Cancel: Exits the hands-free phone system
Repeat: Repeats the previous voice guidance instruction
Go back: Returns to the previous procedure
Help: Reads aloud the function summary if a help comment is regis-
tered for the selected function
227
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the hands-free phone system for the first time
Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register a
cellular phone in the system. The phone registration mode will be entered
automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone registered.
Follow the procedure below to register a cellular phone:
Press or .
The introductory guidance and phone name registration instructions are
heard.
Register a phone name by either of the following methods.
a. Select “Record Name” by using , and say a name to be
registered.
b. Press and say a name to be registered.
Voice guidance instruction to confirm the input is heard.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
A passkey is displayed and heard, and voice guidance instruction for
inputting the passkey into the cellular phone is heard.
Input the passkey into the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the opera-
tion of the phone.
Guidance for registration completion is heard.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
228
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Menu list of the hands-free phone system
■Normal operation
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
Callback - - Dialing a number stored in the
incoming history memory
Redial - - Dialing a number stored in the
outgoing history memory
Dial by
number - - Dialing by inputting a number
Dial by
name - - Dialing by inputting a name
registered in the phone book
Phonebook
Add Entry -Adding a new number
Change
Name -Changing a name in the phone
book
Delete
Entry -Deleting the phone book data
Delete
Speed Dial
(Del Spd
Dial)
-Deleting a registered speed dial
List Names -List the phone book data
Set Speed
Dial
(Speed
Dial)
-Registering speed dial
229
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Setup
Security
Set PIN Setting a PIN code
Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book
Phonebook
Unlock Unlocking the phone book
Phone
Setup
Pair Phone Registering a cellular phone to
be used
Change Name Changing a registered name of
a cellular phone
Delete Deleting a registered cellular
phone
List phones Listing the registered cellular
phones
Select phone Selecting a cellular phone to be
used
Set Passkey Changing the passkey
System
Setup
Guidance Volume
(Guidance Vol) Setting voice guidance volume
Initialize Initialization
First menu Second
menu Third menu Operation detail
230
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
■Using a short cut key
First menu Second menu Operation detail
Dial “XXX (name)” -Dialing a number registered in
the phone book
Phone book add entry -Adding a new number
Phone book change
name -Changing a name of a phone
number in the phone book
Phone book delete
entry -Deleting phone book data
Phone book set speed
dial -Registering speed dial
Phone book delete
speed dial -Deleting speed dial
Phonebook Phonebook Unlock Unlocking the phone book
Phonebook Lock Locking the phone book
231
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
■Automatic adjustment of volume
When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle speed
drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■When using a voice command
●For numbers, say a combination of single digits from zero to nine, # (pound),
(star), and + (plus).
●Say a command correctly and clearly.
■The system may not recognize your voice in the following situations:
●When driving on a rough road
●When driving at high speeds
●When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
●When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
■The following cannot be performed while driving:
●Operating the system with
●Registering a cellular phone to the system
■Changing the passkey
P. 2 3 9
232
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Making a phone call
Dialing by inputting a number
Press and say “Dial by number”.
Press and say the phone number.
■Making a phone call
●Dialing by inputting a number
1. “Dial by number”
●Dialing by inputting a name
1. “Dial by name”
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory
1. “Redial”
●Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory
1. “Call back”
■Receiving a phone call
●Answering the phone
●Refusing the call
■Transferring a call
■Using a call history memory
●Dialing
●Storing data in the phone book
●Deleting
STEP 1
STEP 2
233
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press .
b. Press and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using .
Dialing by inputting a name
Press and say “Dial by name”.
Select a registered name to be input by either of the following
methods:
a. Press and say a registered name.
b. Press and say “List names”. Press while the
desired name is being read aloud.
Dial by one of the following methods:
a. Press .
b. Press and say “Dial”.
c. Select “Dial” by using .
Speed dialing
Press .
Press the preset button in which the desired number is registered.
Press .
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
234
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
When receiving a phone call
■Answering the phone
Press .
■Refusing the call
Press .
Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system while
dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the following meth-
ods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the opera-
tion of the phone.
b. Press
*1.
c. Press and say “Call Transfer” *2.
*1: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call
from the cellular phone to the system during a call.
*2: While the vehicle is in motion, a call cannot be transferred from
the system to the cellular phone.
Using a call history memory
Follow the procedure below to use number stored in call history memory:
Press and say “Redial” (when using a number stored in the
outgoing history memory) or “Call back” (when using a number
stored in the incoming history memory).
STEP 1
235
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Select the number by either of the following methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired number is dis-
played.
b. Select the desired number by using .
The following operations can be performed:
Dialing: Press or select “Dial” by using a voice command or
.
Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” by using a voice
command or .
Deleting: Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .
■Call history
Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history mem-
ories.
■When talking on the phone
●Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
●Keep the volume of the receiving voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
STEP 2
236
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting a cellular phone
Registering a cellular phone
Select “Pair Phone” by using a voice command or , and do the pro-
cedure for registering a cellular phone. (P. 227)
Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free phone system allows the sys-
tem to function. The following function can be used for registered cellular
phones:
■Functions and operation procedures
To enter menu for each function, follow the steps below by using a
voice command or :
●Registering a cellular phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Pair Phone”
●Selecting a cellular phone to be used
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Select Phone”
●Changing a registered name
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Change Name”
●Listing the registered cellular phones
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “List Phones”
●Deleting a cellular phone
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Delete”
●Changing the passkey
1. “Setup” 2. “Phone Setup” 3. “Set Passkey”
237
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Selecting a cellular phone to be used
Select “Select Phone” by using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select a cellular phone to be used by either of the following meth-
ods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or :
a. Press and say the desired phone name.
b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the
desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press .
Pattern B
Select a cellular phone to be used by using .
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .
Select a name of cellular phone to be changed by either of the
following methods:
a. Press and say the desired phone name, and select
“Confirm” by using a voice command or .
b. Press and say “List phones”. While the desired phone
name is being read aloud, press .
c. Select the desired phone name by using .
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
238
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Press or select “Record Name” by using , and say a
new name.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
Listing the registered cellular phones
Selecting “List Phones” by using a voice command or begins read-
ing aloud the list of the registered cellular phones.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.
Pressing while a name of cellular phone is being read selects the
cellular phone, and the following functions will be available:
• Selecting a cellular phone: “Select Phone”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting a cellular phone: “Delete”
Deleting a cellular phone
Select “Delete” by using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select a cellular phone to be deleted by either of the following
methods and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or
:
a. Press and say the name of the desired cellular phone.
b. Press and say “List phones”. While the name of the
desired cellular phone is being read aloud, press .
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
239
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Pattern B
Select a desired cellular phone to be deleted by using .
Changing the passkey
Select “Set Passkey” by using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Press , say a 4 to 8-digit number, and select “Confirm” by
using a voice command or .
Pattern B
Select a 4 to 8-digit number by using .
The number should be input 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has been
input, press once again.
■The number of cellular phone that can be registered
Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 2
STEP 3
240
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Security and system setup
Setting or changing the PIN
■Setting a PIN
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .
Enter a PIN by using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
■Changing the PIN
Select “Set PIN” by using a voice command or .
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
■Security setting items and operation procedure
●Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Set PIN”
●Locking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Lock”
●Unlocking the phone book
1. “Setup” 2. “Security” 3. “Phonebook Unlock”
■System setup items and operation procedure
●Setting voice guidance volume
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Guidance Vol”
●Initialization
1. “Setup” 2. “System Setup” 3. “Initialize”
can only be used for system setup operation.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
241
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Enter the registered PIN by using a voice command or .
Enter a new PIN by using a voice command or .
When using , input the code 1 digit at a time.
Locking or unlocking the phone book
Select “Phonebook lock (Phbk Lock)” or “Phonebook unlock
(Phbk Unlock)” by using a voice command or .
Input the PIN by either of the following methods and select “Con-
firm” by using a voice command or :
a. Press and say the registered PIN.
b. Input a new PIN by using .
Setting voice guidance volume
Select “Guidance Vol” by using .
Change the voice guidance volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
242
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Initialization
Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” by using .
Select “Confirm” by using again.
■Initialization
●The following data in the system can be initialized:
•Phone book
• Outgoing and incoming history
•Speed dial
• Registered cellular phone data
•Security code
●Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored to its
original state.
■When the phone book is locked
The following functions cannot be used:
●Dialing by inputting a name
●Speed dialing
●Dialing a number stored in the call history memory
●Using the phone book
STEP 1
STEP 2
243
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the phone book
Adding a new phone number
The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:
●Inputting a phone number by using a voice command
●Transferring data from the cellular phone
●Inputting a phone number by using
●Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history
■Adding procedure
Select “Add Entry” by using a voice command or .
To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below:
●Adding a new phone number
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Add Entry”
●Setting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
●Changing a registered name
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Change Name”
●Deleting registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Entry”
●Deleting speed dial
1. “Phonebook” 2. “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)”
●Listing the registered data
1. “Phonebook” 2. “List Names”
STEP 1
244
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Use one of the following methods to input a telephone number:
Inputting a telephone number by using a voice command
STEP2-1 Select “By Voice” by using a voice command or .
STEP2-2 Press , say the desired number, and select “Con-
firm” by using a voice command.
Transferring data from the cellular phone
STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” by using a voice
command or .
STEP2-2 Transfer the data from the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for
the details of transferring data.
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Next” until the desired data is dis-
played, and select “Confirm” by using a voice com-
mand.
b. Select the desired data by using .
Inputting a phone number by using
STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” by using .
STEP2-2 Input a phone number by using , and press
once again.
Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.
STEP 2
245
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history
STEP2-1 Select “Call History” by using a voice command or
.
STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” by using a voice com-
mand or .
STEP2-3 Select the data to be registered by either of the follow-
ing methods:
a. Say “Previous” or “Go back” until the desired data is
displayed, and select “Confirm” by using a voice
command.
b. Select the desired data by using .
Select the name to be registered by either of the following meth-
ods, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or :
a. Press and say the desired name.
b. Select “Record Name” by using , and say the desired
name.
Select “Confirm” by using a voice command or again.
In , selecting “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” instead of “Con-
firm” registers the newly added phone number as speed dial.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 3
246
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting speed dial
Select “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)” by using a voice command
or .
Select the data to be registered as speed dial by either of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Press , say desired number, and select “Confirm” by
using a voice command or .
b. Press , and say “List names”. While the desired name is
being read aloud, press , and select “Confirm” by using a
voice command or .
c. Select the desired data by using .
Select the desired preset button, and register the data into speed
dial by either of the following methods:
a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” by using
a voice command or .
b. Press and hold the desired preset button.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
247
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Changing a registered name
Select “Change Name” by using a voice command or .
Select a name to be changed by either of the following methods.
a. Press , say desired name, and select “Confirm” by using
a voice command or .
b. Press , and say “List names”. During the desired name is
read aloud, press , and select “Confirm” by using a voice
command or .
c. Select the desired name by using .
Select “Record Name” with or the talk switch.
Say a new name, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command
or .
Deleting registered data
Select “Delete Entry” by using a voice command or .
Pattern A
Select data to be deleted by either of the following methods, and
select “Confirm” by using a voice command or :
a. Press , and say the name of the desired phone number
to be deleted.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
248
3-3. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
b. Press , say “List phones”. While the name of the desired
phone number is being read aloud, press .
Pattern B
Select data to be deleted by using .
Deleting speed dial
Select “Delete Speed Dial (Del Spd Dial)” by using a voice com-
mand or .
Press the preset button in which the desired speed dial is regis-
tered, and select “Confirm” by using a voice command or .
Listing the registered data
Selecting “List names” by using a voice command begins reading the list
of the registered data.
When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.
Pressing while a data is being read aloud selects the data, and the
following function will be available.
• Dialing: “Dial”
• Changing a registered name: “Change Name”
• Deleting an entry: “Delete Entry”
• Setting speed dial: “Set Speed Dial (Speed Dial)”
■Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
STEP 2
STEP 1
STEP 2
249
3
Interior features
3-4. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Your Lexus is equipped with the illuminated entry system to assist in enter-
ing the vehicle. Owing to the function of the system, the lights shown in the
following illustration automatically turn on/off according to the presence of
the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the
doors are opened/closed, and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode.
Front personal lights (P. 251)
Front interior lights (P. 251)
Rear personal lights ( P. 251 )
Rear interior lights
Door courtesy lighting
Shift lever lighting
This light turns on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode.
Front foot well lighting
Outer foot lights
250
3-4. Using the interior lights
■To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the following lights remain ON when the door is not fully closed and the DOOR
switch is ON, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
●Interior lights
●Front personal lights
●Front foot well lighting
●Rear door courtesy lighting
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customiz-
able features P. 4 35)
251
3-4. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
Front interior lights
Door position OFF/ON
The illuminated entry system is
activated when the switch is not
in the locked position (the door
position is on).
ON/OFF
Personal lights
Front
ON/OFF
As for front personal lights, the
illuminated entry system is acti-
vated even if the switch is in the
off position when the DOOR
switch of the interior light is on.
Rear
Front interior lights and personal lights
252
3-5. Using the storage features
List of storage features
Glove box
Open (push button)
Lock with the mechanical key
Unlock with the mechanical key
Glove box
Overhead console
Cup holders
Console box
Auxiliary box
Glove box
253
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Console box
To open, press the button.
To close, pull up the lever.
■Glove box light
The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.
■Trunk opener main switch
The trunk opener main switch located in the glove box. ( P. 41 )
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Glove box and console box
254
3-5. Using the storage features
■Tray in the console box
■Console box light
The console box light turns on when the tail lights are turned on.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
The tray slides forward/backward and can be
removed.
Console box
255
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Overhead console
The overhead console is useful for
temporarily storing sunglasses and
similar small items.
CAUTION
■Items that should not be left in the overhead console
Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.
If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may
warp or become cracked.
■Caution while driving
Do not leave the overhead console open while driving.
Items may fall out and cause injury.
Overhead console
256
3-5. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Front
To open, press down and release
the front of the cup holder lid.
Rear
Cup holders
257
3-5. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
■Using the cup holder (front) to store small items
■The cup holder (front) can be adjustable to the size of the cups or drink-cans
CAUTION
■Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden
braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.
■When not in use
Keep the cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Remove the holder.
Change the holder position.
Cup holders
258
3-5. Using the storage features
Auxiliary box
To open, press down the knob.
CAUTION
■Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary box closed.
In the event of sudden braking, personal injury may result from contact due to
movement of the open auxiliary box or items that may come out of the auxiliary box.
Auxiliary box
259
3
Interior features
3-6. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and swing
to the side.
Side extender:
Place in side position, then
slide backwards.
260
3-6. Other interior features
Vanity mirror
The light turns on when the
cover is opened.
261
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Clock
■The clock is displayed when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
Without navigation system
Adjusts the hour.
Adjusts the minutes.
Rounds to the nearest hour.*
*: e.g. 1:00 to 1:29 1:00
1:30 to 1:59 2:00
With navigation system
262
3-6. Other interior features
Ashtray
CAUTION
■When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■To prevent fire
●Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then
make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
●Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
Push the back part of the lid to
open.
To remove, pull the ashtray
upwards.
263
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Cigarette lighter
■The cigarette lighter can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
CAUTION
■To avoid burns or fires
●Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
●Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
●Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
Push the back part of the lid to
open, and push the cigarette
lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
264
3-6. Other interior features
Power outlet
■The power outlet can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.
■To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less than 10
A.
265
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)
■The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■When not in use
Set the dial to 0. The indicator light turns off.
CAUTION
■Burns
●Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on
to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs,
cold remedies, etc.)
●Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the
seat and may lead to overheating.
The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow
by blowing air from the seats.
Heats the seats
The indicator light (orange)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
warmer the seats become.
Blows air from the seats
The indicator light (green)
comes on.
The higher the number, the
stronger the airflow becomes.
Left front seat Right front seat
266
3-6. Other interior features
NOTICE
■To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects
(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■To prevent battery discharge
Set the dial to 0 when the engine is not running.
267
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Armrest
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the armrest
Do not place too much strain on the armrest.
Pull the armrest down for use.
268
3-6. Other interior features
Rear sunshade (if equipped)
■The rear sunshade can be used when
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
■Reverse operation feature
The rear sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted into R. The
rear sunshade rises when the shift lever is shifted out of R and vehicle speed
reaches 9 mph (15 km/h).
■When the reverse operation feature does not operate
The rear sunshade may not lower or rise automatically. In this case, press the switch
to lower or raise the rear sunshade.
The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by operating the switch
shown below.
Type A
Raise/lower
Type B
269
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered
Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.
They may get caught, causing injury.
NOTICE
■To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running.
■To ensure normal operation of the sunshade
Observe the following precautions.
●Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.
●Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.
●Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.
●Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.
●Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.
270
3-6. Other interior features
Extended trunk
CAUTION
■When not in use
Ensure that the armrest door is closed.
In the event of sudden braking, items stored in the trunk may be thrown forward into
the cabin, resulting in injury.
Long objects can be loaded in the vehicle by utilizing the trunk space and
rear seat area.
Pull down the armrest.
Open the armrest door.
The armrest door can be locked
and unlocked using the
mechanical key.
Lock
Unlock
STEP 1
STEP 2
271
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Floor mat
CAUTION
■When inserting the floor mat
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the floor mat slipping and interfering with the move-
ment of the pedals during driving, resulting in an accident.
●Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet and the correct
side faces upward.
●Do not place floor mats on top of existing mats.
Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.
Secure the driver’s floor mat
using the hooks provided.
272
3-6. Other interior features
Trunk features
■Cargo hooks
Cargo hooks are provided for
securing loose items.
■Grocery bag hooks
■Luggage mat
Pull the lever upwards when lift-
ing the luggage mat up.
273
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■When the cargo hooks are not in use
To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in
use.
NOTICE
■When closing the trunk
Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.
The luggage mat may get damaged.
The lever can be hooked on the
edge of the trunk.
274
3-6. Other interior features
Garage door opener
The garage door opener (HomeLink Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink.
Programming the HomeLink (for USA owners)
The HomeLink compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons
which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the
programming method below appropriate for the device.
Buttons
Indicator
■Programming the HomeLink
Point the remote control for the
device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)
from the HomeLink control but-
tons.
Keep the indicator light on the
HomeLink in view while pro-
gramming.
The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors,
gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems,
and other devices.
STEP 1
275
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Press and hold down one of the
buttons on the HomeLink and
the button on the transmitter.
When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow
to a rapid flash after 20 seconds,
you can release both buttons.
Test the operation of the
HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button.
If programming a garage door
opener, check to see if the garage
door opens and closes. If the
garage door does not operate, see
if your garage transmitter is of the
Rolling Code type. Press and hold
the programmed HomeLink but-
ton. The garage door has the roll-
ing code feature if the indicator
light (on the HomeLink) flashes
rapidly for 2 seconds and then
remains lit. If your transmitter is the
Rolling Code type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling
code system”.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
276
3-6. Other interior features
■Programming a Rolling Code system (for USA owners)
If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the
heading “Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with the
steps listed below.
Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door
opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by brand of garage door opener.
Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener
for the location of the training button.
Press the training button.
Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button
twice. The garage door may open.
If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the
door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by opening
the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize
the HomeLink transceiver and operate the garage door.
Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system
for any of the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■Programming an entry gate (for USA owners)/Programming all
devices in the Canadian market
Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the sur-
face of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while programming.
Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control
button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.
When the indicator light on the HomeLink compatible trans-
ceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
277
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly pro-
grammed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates cor-
rectly.
Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of
the remaining HomeLink buttons.
■Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems, home door
locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.
■Reprogramming a button
The individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased but can be
reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Basic program-
ming” instructions.
Operating the HomeLink
Press the appropriate HomeLink button. The HomeLink indicator
light on the HomeLink transceiver should turn on.
The HomeLink continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as
the button is pressed.
Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all three programs)
Press and hold down the 2 outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to
erase the programs stored in the
HomeLink memory.
STEP 5
STEP 6
278
3-6. Other interior features
■Before programming
●Install a new battery in the transmitter.
●The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink.
■Certification for the garage door opener
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC
Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.
CAUTION
■When programming a garage door or other remote control device
The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to
prevent potential harm.
■Conforming to federal safety standards
Do not use the HomeLink Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener
or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety
standards.
This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or
device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.
279
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Compass
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which
the vehicle is heading.
■Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
push and hold AUTO for 3
seconds.
■Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
280
3-6. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the
earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will devi-
ate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Push and hold AUTO for 6 sec-
onds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on the
compass display.
STEP 1
STEP 2
281
3-6. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Press AUTO, and referring to the map above, select the number
of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the cali-
bration is complete.
■Circling calibration
Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Push and hold AUTO for 9 sec-
onds.
C appears on the compass display.
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/
h) or less in a circle until a direction
is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is dis-
played.
STEP 3
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
282
3-6. Other interior features
■Conditions unfavorable to correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions:
●The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
●The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
●The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interfer-
ence by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
●The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)
●The battery has been disconnected.
●A door is open.
CAUTION
■While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
■When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neigh-
borhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.
NOTICE
■To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■To ensure normal operation of the compass
●Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's
magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
●During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows,
etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
Maintenance and care 4
283
4-1. Maintenance and
care............................... 284
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle exterior............ 284
Cleaning and protecting
the vehicle interior.............. 287
4-2. Maintenance .................. 290
Maintenance
requirements........................ 290
General maintenance .......... 292
Emission inspection and
maintenance (I/M)
programs................................ 295
4-3. Do-it-yourself
maintenance ................ 296
Do-it-yourself service
precautions ........................... 296
Hood ......................................... 300
Positioning a floor jack .......... 301
Engine compartment........... 303
Tires............................................. 318
Tire inflation pressure........... 326
Wheels ..................................... 330
Air conditioning filter........... 332
Electronic key battery.......... 334
Checking and replacing
fuses......................................... 336
Headlight aim (vehicles with
discharge headlights) ........ 344
Light bulbs................................ 345
284
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■Automatic car washes
●Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and
harm your vehicle’s paint.
■High pressure car washes
●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the
windows.
●Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-
erly.
■Touch-up paint (if equipped)
Touch-up paint may be used to cover small chips or scratches.
Apply the paint soon after the damage occurs or corrosion may set in. To apply the
touch-up paint so it is hardly noticeable the trick is to apply it only to the bare spots.
Apply only the smallest amount possible and do not paint the surface around the
scratch or chip.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi-
tion.
●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt
and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
●Wipe away any water.
●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
285
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■Aluminum wheels
Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes
or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same
mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
■Bumpers and side moldings
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
■To prevent deterioration and do by corrosion
●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron
powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
CAUTION
■Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled suffi-
ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
286
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces
Do not use organic cleaners such as benzene or gasoline.
■Cleaning the exterior lights
●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.
Wax may cause damage to the lenses.
■When using an automatic car wash (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing
windshield wipers)
Set the wiper switch to OFF.
If the wiper switch is in AUTO, the wipers may
operate and the wiper blades may be dam-
aged.
OFF
287
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep
it in top condition:
■Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces
with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■Cleaning the leather areas
●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe
off all remaining traces of detergent.
●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining
moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.
■Synthetic leather areas
●Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
●Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge
or soft cloth.
●Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt
and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
288
4-1. Maintenance and care
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the
rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to
gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the
heater wires or antenna.
■Caring for leather areas
Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to main-
tain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.
■Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or
brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excel-
lent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.
■Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the
belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■Water in the vehicle
●Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor.
●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(P. 77 )
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,
resulting in death or severe injury.
289
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■Cleaning detergents
Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle inte-
rior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
●Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or
acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.
●Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, or alcohol.
■Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather
surfaces.
●Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park
the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as
they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.
■Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into
contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also
cause the body to rust.
■Cleaning the inside of the rear window
Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
290
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure perfor-
mance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair
shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular main-
tenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular
checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.
■General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself
or by a Lexus dealer.
■Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the mainte-
nance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “War-
ranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
■Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Lexus Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,
“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet”.
291
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer
●Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all
systems on your vehicle.
●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been
performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your
vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.
CAUTION
■Warning in handling of battery
●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile com-
ponents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.
●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by compo-
nent wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash
any affected area immediately.
●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after han-
dling. (P. 31 4)
292
4-2. Maintenance
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery Maintenance-free. (P. 31 4 )
Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 3 1 1 )
Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 309 )
Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 3 0 5 )
Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?
Power steering fluid At the correct level? (P. 3 1 2 )
Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter?
(P. 3 1 1 )
Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 31 7 )
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed
at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owners
Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service
shop for advice.
293
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal • Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be hold securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clearance
and correct amount of free play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Head restraints • Move smoothly and lock securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?
Lights
• Do all the lights come on?
• Headlights aimed correctly?
(P. 344)
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system operate
smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats • Do the seat controls operate prop-
erly?
294
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
Items Check points
Door/trunk • Operate smoothly?
Engine hood • The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks • Is there any leakage after parking?
Tire
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing
maintenance checks.
295
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include
OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the oper-
ation of the emission control system.
■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in
the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test
and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service
the vehicle.
■Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
●When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may
not be completely set.
●When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driv-
ing trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
296
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct proce-
dure given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (P. 314)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
•Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (P. 3 1 1 )
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding brake
fluid)
Engine coolant level (P. 309)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene gly-
col based non-silicate, non-amine,
non-nitrite and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
For the USA:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and
50% deionized water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and
45% deionized water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
297
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Items Parts and tools
Engine oil level (P. 305 )
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used
only for adding engine oil)
Fuses (P. 33 6 ) • Fuse with same amperage rating as
original
Tire inflation pressure (P. 326) • Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Headlight aim (P. 3 4 4 ) • Phillips-head screwdriver
Power steering fluid
level (P. 3 1 2 )
• Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON II or III
•Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding power
steering fluid)
Radiator and condenser (
P. 311 )
Washer fluid (P. 3 1 7 )
• Water washer fluid containing anti-
freeze (for winter use)
•Funnel
298
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move sud-
denly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury.
■When working on the engine compartment:
●Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driv-
ing as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine
compartment.
●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel
and battery fumes are flammable.
●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and
corrosive sulfuric acid.
●Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
■When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille:
Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is OFF.
With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric
cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the
coolant temperature is high.
(P. 311)
■Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting
in the eyes.
299
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■If you remove the air cleaner:
Driving with the air filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in
the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
300
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Hood
CAUTION
■Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and
cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the hood catch and lift the
hood.
STEP 1
STEP 2
301
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack correctly.
Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■Front
■Rear
302
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■When raising your vehicle:
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious
injury.
●Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
●Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by
the floor jack.
Always use automotive jack stands on a solid, level surface.
●Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
●Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P.
●Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehi-
cle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
●When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the
floor jack.
●Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as
the one shown in the illustration.
303
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine compartment
Power steering fluid reservoir
(P. 312)
Engine oil filler cap
(P. 306)
Engine oil level dipstick
(P. 305)
Brake fluid reservoir
(P. 311)
Battery (P. 314)
Fuse box (P. 336 )
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (P. 311)
Radiator (P. 311)
Washer fluid tank
(P. 317)
Engine coolant reservoir
(P. 309)
304
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment cover
■Removing the engine compartment cover
Front
Right-hand side
• When installing the cover, make sure that the engine coolant reservoir
hose positioned as shown in the illustration.
Left-hand side
305
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Installing the clips
Press the tip of the clip against a
hard surface, such as a desk, to
allow the center part of the clip
to be pushed up.
Insert
Press
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait
a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the
engine.
Hold a rag under the end and pull
the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the
oil level.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
306
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
Low
Full
■Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near the
low level mark, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the
engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
It takes about 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.) to raise the oil level from low to full on the
dipstick.
STEP 6
Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
Items Clean funnel
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
307
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Recommended viscosity
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for
good fuel economy, and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available,
SAE 10W-30 oil may be used.
However, it should be replaced
with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil
change.
■How to read oil container labels
Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that
help you to select the proper oil.
Outside temperature
308
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Engine oil consumption
●The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of
the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
●More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and fre-
quent acceleration and deceleration.
●A new engine consumes more oil.
●When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may
have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.
●Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000
km)
●If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp.qt.) every 600 miles (1000 km),
contact your Lexus dealer.
■Changing the engine oil (USA only)
To reset the oil change system, follow the procedure below:
1. Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF with the trip meter A reading
shown. (P. 124)
2. While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch to the IGNITION ON mode. Continue to press and hold the button until
the trip meter displays 000000.
CAUTION
■Used engine oil
●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin
disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid
prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dis-
pose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.
Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information con-
cerning recycling or disposal.
●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
309
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the F and L lines on the res-
ervoir when the engine is cold.
Full
Low
If the level is on or below the L line,
add coolant up to the F line.
NOTICE
■To prevent serious engine damage:
Check the oil level on regular basis.
■When replacing the engine oil
●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened.
■When adding the engine coolant
When installing the reservoir cap, make sure
that the engine coolant reservoir hose posi-
tioned as shown in the illustration.
310
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock
and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology.
USA: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50%
deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water. (Enabled: -44F [-42C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not remove the radiator cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is
removed, causing burns or other injuries.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water not straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water
and anti freeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection
and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
311
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their
condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
Brake fluid
■Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the MAX and MIN lines
on the tank.
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
■Adding fluid
CAUTION
■When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser, as they may be hot and you may be burned.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use
only newly opened brake fluid.
312
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Power steering fluid
■Fluid level
The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.
Full (when cold)
Add fluid (when cold)
Full (when hot)
Add fluid (when hot)
Hot: Vehicle has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 min-
utes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures. (Fluid tempera-
ture, 140F - 175F [60C - 80C])
Cold: Engine has not been run for about 5 hours. (Room tempera-
ture, 50F - 85F [10C - 30C])
CAUTION
■When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or
when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
313
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Checking the fluid level
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir.
Remove the reservoir cap by turning it counterclockwise and
wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinstall the reservoir cap.
Remove the reservoir cap again and look at the fluid level.
Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON II or III
Items Rag or paper towel and funnel (only for adding fluid)
CAUTION
■Checking the fluid level
Take care, as the reservoir may be hot.
NOTICE
■When adding fluid
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.
■After replacing the reservoir cap
Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or dam-
age.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
314
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there
are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
■Checking battery condition
Check the battery condition using the indicator color.
Blue: Good condition
White: Charging is necessary.
Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.
Red: Not working properly,
have the battery checked by
your Lexus dealer.
315
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the
ground cable.
●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and discon-
necting the charger cables to the battery.
■After recharging the battery
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.
1. Shift the shift lever to P.
2. Open and close any of the doors.
3. Restart the engine.
316
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Chemicals in the battery:
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydro-
gen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious
injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery:
●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
●Keep children away from the battery.
■Where to safety charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or
closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a
quicker rate.
■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
●If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
traveling to the nearest medical facility.
●If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical atten-
tion immediately.
●If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and
follow the procedure above if necessary.
●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw
egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.
317
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the
warning message appears on the
multi-information display, the
washer tank may be empty. Add
washer fluid.
NOTICE
■When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accesso-
ries are turned off.
CAUTION
■When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the washer fluid
contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.
NOTICE
■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.
318
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and
treadwear.
■Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear indi-
cators is shown by the TWI or
marks, etc., molded on the side-
wall of each tire.
Check spare tire condition and
pressure if not rotated.
■Tire rotation
If equipped with full-size spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
Front
319
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valve and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valve and transmit-
ters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed,
new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning
system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmit-
ter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (P. 321)
If equipped with compact spare tire
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and extend
tire life, Lexus recommends that
tire rotation is carried out at the
same interval as tire inspection.
■The tire pressure warning system
Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses
tire pressure warning valve and transmitters to detect low tire infla-
tion pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 366)
Vehicles with compact spare tire: The compact spare tire is not
equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitters.
Front
320
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following
circumstances:
●When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling
speed or load weight, etc.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (P. 417)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on
this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode.
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly three times.
Wait for a few minutes with the IGNITION ON mode, and then
turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
321
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Registering and selecting ID codes
■Registering ID codes
2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be
registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can
switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure
warning select switch.
There are 2 settings:
“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.
“2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new
set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your
Lexus dealer.
■Selecting ID codes
When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches
the new tire set. If the tire pressure select switch is set to the wrong tire
setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly.
After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light
comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
MAIN
2nd
322
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the
fabric or bulges indicating internal damage
●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.
■Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered,
the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20
minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indi-
cate a system malfunction.
■Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they
have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross
Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is
greater.
As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (P. 326, 423) .
323
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction perfor-
mance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered
or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires
is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be ade-
quate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All sea-
son tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with
snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration
and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capac-
ity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original
equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install
studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 169)
■Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.
■If you push the tire pressure reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases,
the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If
repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have
the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning
light does not flash 3 times.
●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light
blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.
324
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure
checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily
vehicle checks.
■Tire pressure warning system certification
For vehicles sold in the USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installa-
tion. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful inter-
ference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by
one or more of the following measures:
●Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
●Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
●Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation of the device.
325
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause
damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics,
which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.
●Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.
●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.
●Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.
●Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
●Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.
■When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light
may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
NOTICE
■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushion-
ing ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the
tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.
■If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
327
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended lev-
els, adjust inflate the tire.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and
adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leak-
age.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
328
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
●Reduced fuel efficiency
●Reduced driving comfort and tire life
●Reduced safety
●Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
●Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure
reading.
●Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures
that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.
●Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the
tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is bal-
anced.
329
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur
and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
●Excessive wear
●Uneven wear
●Poor handling
●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
●Poor sealing of the tire bead
●Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
●A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leak-
age, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as
soon as possible.
330
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
■When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and trans-
mitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in
the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 3 2 0)
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Oth-
erwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling con-
trol.
■Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they
are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim
width, and offset.
Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.
Lexus does not recommend using:
●Wheels of different sizes or types
●Used wheels
●Bent wheels that have been straightened
■Aluminum wheel precautions
●Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with
your aluminum wheels.
●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire
chains.
●Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a
plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
331
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■When replacing wheels
●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the
Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other
qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.
●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-
genuine wheels.
332
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to main-
tain air conditioning efficiency.
■Replacement method
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Open the glove box. Remove
the glove box cover.
Remove the filter cover.
Remove the filter.
Be sure that the correct side of
the filter faces up when installing
it.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
333
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Checking interval
Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or
early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.)
■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■To prevent damage to the system
●When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.
●When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.
■Cleaning method
If the filter is dirty, clean by blow-
ing compressed air through the
filter from the downward side.
Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm)
from the filter and blow for
approximately 2 minutes at 72
psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or
bar).
If it is not available, have the filter
cleaned by your Lexus dealer.
334
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Electronic key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■You will need the following items:
●Flathead screwdriver
●Small Phillips-head screwdriver
●Lithium battery (CR1632)
■Replacing the battery
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the +
terminal facing up.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
335
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■If the electronic key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
●The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will
not function properly.
●The operational range is reduced.
■Use a CR1632 lithium battery
●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.
●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children.
These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.
NOTICE
■For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
●Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
●Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
336
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.
If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Remove the engine compartment cover.
P. 30 4
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tabs in and lift the lid
off.
Driver's side instrument
panel
Remove the lid.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”
(P. 338) for details about which fuse to check.
Remove the fuse with the pull-
out tool.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
337
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Check if the fuse has blown.
Ty p e A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appro-
priate amperage rating. The
amperage rating can be found
on the fuse box lid.
Ty p e B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an appro-
priate amperage rating.
Ty p e C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 6
338
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1PSB 30 A Pre-collision seat belt
2H-LP CLN 30 A
3P-P / SEAT 30 A Power seat
4RR DEF 50 A Rear window defogger
5ABS NO.2 30 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stabil-
ity control system
6FAN MAIN 50 A Electric cooling fans
7ABS NO.1 50 A Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stabil-
ity control system
8HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
9RR FOG 10 A
10 ALT-CDS 10 A Alternator condenser
11 ST 30 A Starting system
339
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
12 ALT 140 A
PSB, H-LP CLN, P-P/SEAT, RR DEF,
ABS NO.2, FAN MAIN, ABS NO.1,
HTR, RR FOG, RR DOOR RH, RR
DOOR LH, FUEL OPN, FR FOG,
OBD, STOP, TI & TE, A/C, PWR,
DOOR NO.2, S/ROOF, GAUGE
NO.2, POWER, P/SEAT
13 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system
14 IG2 20 A
GAUGE NO.2, IGN, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system
15 HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights
16 ETCS 10 A Electronic throttle control system
17 E-ACM 10 A Electric active control mount
18 A/C CTRL PNL 15 A Air conditioning system
19 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
20 AM2 7.5 A Starting system
21 EFI MAIN 30 A EFI NO.2, EFI NO.3, fuel system, ECT
system
22 AMP 30 A Audio system
23 AMP2 30 A Audio system
24 DOOR NO.1 25 A Power door lock system
25 RADIO NO.1 15 A Audio system
26 ECU-B NO.1 10 A ECU powers
27 DOME 10 A Interior lights, meters, vanity lights
28 H-LP (LH) 15 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
29 H-LP (RH) 15 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
Fuse Ampere Circuit
340
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
30 H-LP (LL) 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
31 H-LP (RL) 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
32 HORN 10 A Horns
33 EFI NO.1 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem, ECT system
34 MPX-B 10 A Meters
35 A/F 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
36 S-HORN 7.5 A Horn
37 EFI NO.2 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
38 EFI NO.3 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem
Fuse Ampere Circuit
341
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1RR DOOR RH 25 A Power window
2RR DOOR LH 25 A Power window
3FUEL OPN 7.5 A Fuel filler door opener
4FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights
5OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
6ECU-B NO.2 7.5 A ECU powers
7STOP 10 A Stop lights
8TI & TE 30 A Tilt and telescopic steering
9A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system
10 PWR 25 A Power windows
11 DOOR NO.2 25 A Main body ECU
12 S/ROOF 30 A Moon roof
13 TAIL 10 A Front and rear side marker lights, tail
lights, license plate lights
14 PANEL 7.5 A Switch illumination
342
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
15 ECU-IG NO. 1 10 A
Moon roof, seat heaters, power win-
dows, clock, automatic windshield
wiper, electric cooling fans, driving
position memory system, seat position
memory system
16 ECU-IG NO. 2 7.5 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle stabil-
ity control system, traction control sys-
tem, brake assist system, cruise
control system, stop lights, shift lock
control system
17 A/C NO. 2 10 A Air conditioning system, rear window
defogger
18 WASH 10 A Windshield washer
19 S-HTR 20 A Seat heaters, air conditioning system
20 GAUGE NO. 1 10 A Emergency flashers, back-up lights,
rear sunshade, charging system
21 WIP 25 A Windshield wipers
22 H-LP LVL 7.5 A Headlight leveling system
23 IGN 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection sys-
tem, SRS airbag system, steering lock
system
24 GAUGE NO. 2 7.5 A Meters
25 ECU-ACC 7.5 A Clock, main body ECU
26 CIG 20 A Cigarette lighter
27 PWR OUTLET 20 A Power outlet
28 RADIO NO. 2 7.5 A Audio system
29 MIR HTR 15 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers
Fuse Ampere Circuit
343
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
30 POWER 30 A Power window
31 P/SEAT 30 A Power seat
■After a fuse is replaced
●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may
need replacement. (P. 3 45 )
●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
■If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.
CAUTION
■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other
object in place of a fuse.
●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
●Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus
dealer.
Fuse Ampere Circuit
344
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Headlight aim (vehicles with discharge headlights)
■Vertical movement adjusting bolts
Adjustment bolt A
Adjustment bolt B
■Before checking the headlight aim
Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around
the headlight is not deformed.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Sit in the driver’s seat.
Bounce the vehicle several times.
■Adjusting the headlight aim
Turn bolt A in either direction
using a Phillips-head screw-
driver.
Remember the turning direction
and the number of turns in mind.
Turn bolt B the same number of
turns and in the same direction
as step 1 using a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
If the error is over the value
specified above, take the vehicle
to your Lexus dealer to adjust
the headlight aim.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
345
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about
replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.
■Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 41 9)
■Remove the engine compartment cover.
P. 30 4
■Front bulb locations
■Rear bulb locations
Headlight high beam
Headlight
low beam
(halogen
bulb)
Front turn signal light
Front side marker light
Parking light
Rear turn signal light
Stop/tail light
Rear side marker light
346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Replacing light bulbs
■Headlight low beams (for vehicles without discharge bulbs)
Unplug the connector.
Remove the cover.
Release the lock.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
347
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Remove the light bulb.
■Headlight high beams
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the connector while
depressing the lock release.
■Parking lights and front side marker lights, front turn signal lights
Remove the access hole cover.
STEP 4
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 1
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Parking light and front side
marker light
Front turn signal light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Parking light and front side marker light
Remove the light bulb.
Front turn signal light
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 3
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Stop/tail, rear turn signal and rear side marker lights
Open the trunk lid and remove the
access hole cover.
Stop/tail light
Rear turn signal light
Rear side marker light
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Stop/tail light
Remove the light bulb.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Rear turn signal light
Remove the light bulb.
Rear side marker light
Remove the light bulb.
■Bulbs other than the above
If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer
replace it.
●Headlight low beams (discharge bulbs)
●Front fog lights
●Tail lights
●High mounted stoplight
●License plate lights
●Back-up lights
STEP 3
STEP 3
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Tempo-
rary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a
malfunction.
●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.
●Water has built up inside the headlight.
■Discharge headlights
If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on, or may
go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is
restored.
■LED stop lights
The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn
out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■Replacing light bulbs
●Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turn-
ing off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
●Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by
the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
●Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may
result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage
the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
●Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam headlight bulbs, connectors,
power supply circuits, or related components.
Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.
■Discharge headlights
●Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing discharge headlights (including light
bulbs).
●Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket when
the headlights are turned on.
An extremely high voltage of 20000 V will be discharged and could result in
serious injury or death by electric shock.
■To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
When trouble arises 5
353
5-1. Essential
information................... 354
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ...................................... 354
If you think something is
wrong...................................... 360
Fuel pump shut off
system...................................... 361
Event data recorder.............. 362
5-2. Steps to take in an
emergency.................... 364
If a warning light turns
on or a warning buzzer
sounds... ................................. 364
If a warning message is
displayed................................ 375
If you have a flat tire.............. 386
If the engine will not
start.......................................... 396
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P....................... 398
If you lose your keys............... 399
If the electronic key does
not operate properly......... 400
If the vehicle battery is
discharged............................ 402
If your vehicle
overheats .............................. 405
If the vehicle becomes
stuck........................................ 407
354
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Lexus dealer before towing.
●The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be tem-
porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing
eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short dis-
tances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehi-
cle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condi-
tion.
Towing eyelet
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your
Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat
bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial
and local laws.
If towing from the front, the vehicle’s rear wheels and axles must be in good
condition. (P. 358)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
5
When trouble arises
355
5-1. Essential information
Installing towing eyelet
Remove the eyelet cover using a
flat head screwdriver.
To protect the bodywork, place a
rag between the screwdriver and
the vehicle body, as shown in the
illustration.
■Emergency towing procedure
Release the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode (engine
off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running) position.
CAUTION
■Caution while towing
●Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on
the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains.
●If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not
function, making steering and braking more difficult.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with front wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to the transmission.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 1
356
5-1. Essential information
Insert the towing eyelet into the
hole and tighten partially by hand.
Tighten down the towing eyelet
securely using a wheel nut wrench.
STEP 2
STEP 3
■Location of the emergency towing eyelet
P. 3 8 6
CAUTION
■Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle
Make sure that towing eyelet are installed securely.
If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead
to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.
5
When trouble arises
357
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
NOTICE
■To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.
358
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel lift-type truck
From the front
Release the parking brake.
From the rear
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheel.
NOTICE
■To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the
opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could
be damaged while being towed.
NOTICE
■To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
5
When trouble arises
359
5-1. Essential information
Using a flat bed truck
If your Lexus is transported by a
flat bed truck, it should be tied
down at the locations shown in the
illustration.
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45.
Do not overly tighten the tie downs
or the vehicle may be damaged.
Front
NOTICE
■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not use the rear transport eyelets.
They are used for shipping purposes only.
360
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs
adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
■Visible symptoms
●Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■Audible symptoms
●Changes in exhaust sound
●Excessive tire squeal when cornering
●Strange noises related to the suspension system
●Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■Operational symptoms
●Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
●Appreciable loss of power
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches
the floor
5
When trouble arises
361
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is acti-
vated.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode
or OFF.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged
and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag
inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to
the engine.
STEP 1
STEP 2
362
5-1. Essential information
Event data recorder
In a crash or a near car crash event
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a crash or a near
car crash event, this device may record some or all of the following infor-
mation:
●Engine speed
●Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
●Vehicle speed
●To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
●Position of the transmission shift lever
●Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not
●Driver's seat position
●SRS airbag deployment data
●SRS airbag system diagnostic data
●Front passenger's occupant classification
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improv-
ing vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR
does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of
your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal
vehicle performance.
Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to
that record data in a crash or a near car crash event.
5
When trouble arises
363
5-1. Essential information
Disclosure of the data
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party
except when:
●An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a
leased vehicle) is obtained
●Officially requested by the police or other authorities
●Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
●Ordered by a court law
However, if necessary Lexus will:
●Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance
●Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without dis-
closing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed neces-
sary
●Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information
to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes
364
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.
Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:
P. 378
Warning light Warning light/Details
(USA)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
Indicates the following;
•Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake booster system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or
flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessar-
ily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
365
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
(USA)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates the following:
•Empty fuel tank
• Loose fuel tank
• Malfunction in the electronic engine control system;
• Malfunction in the electronic throttle control system; or
• Malfunction in the electronic automatic transmission con-
trol system.
Warning light Warning light/Details
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system; or
• Front passenger occupant classification system
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
366
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedure.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning light turns off.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(USA)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•The ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
Pre-collision system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer*1)
Indicates that a door or trunk
is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Rear light failure warning
light
Indicates one or more stop
lights are burned out.
Have the defective bulbs
replaced by your Lexus dealer.
Low fuel level warning light
Indicates remaining fuel level
is low.
(Approximately 2.8 gal.
[10.5 L, 2.3 Imp.gal.] or less)
Refuel the vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
367
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light (warning buzzer*2)
Warns the driver to fasten his
or her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(with naviga-
tion system)
(without navi-
gation system)
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer*2)
Warns the front passenger to
fasten his or her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
Tire pressure warning light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure.
Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure.
When the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire pres-
sure warning system
Have the system checked by
your Lexus dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
368
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1: Open door warning buzzer:
P. 378
*2: Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the
driver and front passenger that his or her sear belt is not fastened. The buzzer
sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of
at least 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer
will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.
Master warning light
A buzzer sounds and the
warning light comes on and
flashes to indicate that the
master warning system has
detected a malfunction.
P. 375
■First check when the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
Check the following:
●Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
●Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
369
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the following:
• The airbag sensor assembly
• The front airbag sensors
• The side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
• The curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
•The driver’s seat position sensor
• The driver’s seat belt buckle switch
• Occupant detection system (ECU and sensors)
• AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights
• Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
• The seat belt pretensioner assemblies
• The inflators
• The interconnecting wiring and power sources
■Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light may flash and buzzer may sound.
■When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire
pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.
■The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air
leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjust-
ing the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).
370
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
Full-size spare tire
The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.
The tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare
tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the tire pressure warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
Compact spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even
though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the
repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.
5
When trouble arises
371
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.
●If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not regis-
tered in the tire pressure warning computer.
●If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.
●If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) or higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
●If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.
●If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
●If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed (vehicles with full-
size spare tire).
●If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or
wheel housings.
●If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used. (Even if you use Lexus wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)
●If tire chains are used.
●If the full-size spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal recep-
tion.
●If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put in the
trunk (vehicles with full-size spare tire).
372
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently
when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, have
it checked by your Lexus dealer.
■Customization that can be configured at Lexus dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. (Customizable
features P. 435)
CAUTION
■If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of
vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure immediately.
●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-
ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat,
change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus
dealer.
●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could
lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
5
When trouble arises
373
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is sig-
nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-
sure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea-
sons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction tell-
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) to continue to function properly.
374
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warn-
ing system may not operate properly.
5
When trouble arises
375
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning message is displayed
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle
that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and contact your Lexus dealer.
Warning message Details
(Flashing)
Indicates an abnormal engine oil pressure.
A buzzer also sounds.
If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and per-
form the following actions:
Master warning light
The master warning light also
comes on or flashes in order to
indicate that a message is cur-
rently being displayed on the
multi-information display.
Multi-information display
If any of the warning message turns on again after performing the fol-
lowing actions, contact your Lexus dealer.
376
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the
system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the
vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.
Warning message Details
(Flashing)
Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock system.
A buzzer also sounds.
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the pre-collision system.
A buzzer also sounds.
5
When trouble arises
377
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details
(If equipped)
Indicates intuitive parking assist malfunction.
A buzzer also sounds.
The malfunctioning assist-sensor is shown flashing on
the display.
(Flashing)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the radar cruise control
system.
A buzzer also sounds.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Switch the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to OFF and then to IGNITION
ON mode again to reset the cruise control system.
Indicates a malfunction in the TRAC and VSC sys-
tems.
378
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedure.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message turns off.
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that one or
more of the doors is not
fully closed.
The system also indi-
cates which doors are
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that one or more of
the doors is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Make sure that all of the
doors are closed.
Indicates that the hood is
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that hood is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Close the hood.
5
When trouble arises
379
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that the trunk is
not fully closed.
flashes and a
buzzer sounds to indi-
cate that trunk is not fully
closed (with the vehicle
having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Close the trunk.
(Flashing)
Indicates that the moon
roof is not fully closed
(with the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and the driver’s
door opened).
A buzzer also sounds.
Close the moon roof.
(Flashing)
Indicates that the parking
brake is still engaged
(with the vehicle having
reached a speed of more
than 3 mph [5 km/h]).
A buzzer also sounds.
Release the parking
brake.
Indicates that the washer
fluid level is low.
A buzzer also sounds.
Add washer fluid.
380
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction procedure
Indicates that engine oil
level is low.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check the level of engine
oil, and add if necessary.
(USA only)
Indicates that the engine
oil is scheduled to be
changed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check and the engine oil,
and change if necessary.
Comes on approximately
4500 miles (7200 km)
after the engine oil is
changed. (The indicator
will not work properly
unless the oil mainte-
nance data has been
reset.)
(USA only)
Indicates that the engine
oil should be changed.
A buzzer also sounds.
Check and change the
engine oil.
Comes on approximately
5000 miles (8000 km)
after the engine oil is
changed (and the oil
maintenance data has
been reset).
5
When trouble arises
381
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the pre-
collision system is not
currently functional.
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the grille and the
sensor.
This message appears
when the pre-collision
system is hot. In this case,
wait until the system
cools down.
(If equipped)
Indicates that the sensor
of intuitive parking assist
is dirty or covered with
ice.
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
(If equipped) (Flashing)
(Flashing)
Indicates that the radar
cruise control sensor is
dirty or covered with ice.
A buzzer also sounds.
Clean the sensor.
382
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Warning message Details Correction procedure
(Flashing and then con-
tinuously on)
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Indicates that the radar
cruise control system is
unable to judge vehicle-
to-vehicle distance
because the windshield
wipers are set at high
speed operation mode.
A buzzer also sounds.
Turn them off or set them
to either the intermittent
or the slow mode.
(Flashing)
(If equipped)
Indicates that your vehi-
cle is nearing the vehicle
ahead (in radar cruise
mode).
A buzzer also sounds.
Slow the vehicle by apply-
ing the brakes.
■Changing the engine oil (USA only)
Make sure to reset the oil change system. (P. 305)
■Warning light display in radar cruise mode
In the following cases, the warning light may not be displayed even if vehicle-to-
vehicle distance closes.
●When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the
vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle
●When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed
●Immediately after cruise control speed is set
●At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed
5
When trouble arises
383
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedure for problem in smart access system with push-button start.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check
that the warning message turns off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Once
(Comes on for 8 seconds.)
(Flashing)
Indicates that an
attempt was made
to start the engine
without the elec-
tronic key being
present, or the
electronic key was
not functioning
normally.
Start the engine
with the elec-
tronic key
present.*
Once
3 times
(Flashing)
Indicates that a
door other than
the driver’s door
has been opened
and closed with
the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch in any
mode other than
OFF and the elec-
tronic key outside
of the detection
area.
Confirm the loca-
tion of the elec-
tronic key.
384
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warni ng mess age Details Correction
procedure
Once
3 times
(Flashing)
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened or
closed with the
shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch in
any mode other
than OFF and the
electronic key
outside of the
detection area.
Tu r n t h e
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
OFF or confirm
the location of the
electronic key.
Con-
tinuous
Con-
tinuous
(Displayed alternately)
(Flashing)
Indicates that the
driver’s door has
been opened or
closed with the
shift lever out of in
P, the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch in any
mode other than
OFF and the elec-
tronic key outside
of the detection
area.
• Shift the shift
lever to P.
•Confirm the
location of the
electronic key.
Once
(Flashing)
Indicates that the
key battery is low.
Replace the bat-
tery. (P. 33 4)
5
When trouble arises
385
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle,
the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties
receiving the signal from the key. (P. 26)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning message Details Correction
procedure
Indicates that a
door has been
opened or closed
and the “ENGINE
START STOP”
switch has been
switched twice to
ACCESSORY
mode from OFF.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
while applying the
brakes.
(Comes on for 15 seconds.)
(Flashing)
Indicates that the
steering lock has
not released.
Press the
“ENGINE START
STOP” switch
again while turn-
ing the steering
wheel with the
brake pedal
depressed.
Once
Indicates that the
electronic key
does not operate
properly.
P. 40 1
386
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■Before jacking up the vehicle
●Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
●Set the parking brake.
●Shift the shift lever to P.
●Stop the engine.
●Turn on the emergency flashers.
■Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
Jack
Jack handle
Spare tire Compact spare tire
Wrench
Towing eyelet
5
When trouble arises
387
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
Remove the hook.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
388
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Lift up the hook of the panel on the
trunk floor.
Secure the panel using the hook
provided.
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
389
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one
turn).
Turn the jack portion “A” by hand
until the notch of the jack is in con-
tact with the jack point.
STEP 1
Flat tire Wheel chock
positions
Front
Left-hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side tire
Right-
hand side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side tire
Rear
Left-hand
side
In front of the
front right-
hand side tire
Right-
hand side
In front of the
front left-
hand side tire
STEP 2
STEP 3
390
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and the
tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the spare tire
Remove any dirt or foreign matter
from the wheel contact surface.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is in
motion, and the tire may come off
the vehicle.
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 1
5
When trouble arises
391
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Install the spare tire and loosely
tighten each nut by hand to
approximately the same amount.
Turn the lug nuts until the washers
come into contact with the wheel.
Lower the vehicle.
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
10.5 kgf•m (103 N•m, 76 ft•lbf)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
STEP 2
Wheel nut
Washer
Disc wheel
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
392
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■The compact spare tire
●The compact spare tire is identified by the label TEMPORARY USE ONLY on
the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
●Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 417 )
■When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you
replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the
light remains on.
■If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice (vehicles with com-
pact spare tire)
Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the following steps
and fit tire chains to the front tires.
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of the vehi-
cle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■After completing the tire change
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 3 20)
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
5
When trouble arises
393
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle sud-
denly falling off the jack.
●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and
removing tire chains.
●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires
on this vehicle.
●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.
●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or
near the vehicle may be injured.
■Replacing a flat tire
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
●Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.
Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
●Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 10.5 kgf•m (103 N•m, 76
ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
394
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■When using the compact spare tire
●Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for use with your
vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.
●Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
●Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.
●Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.
■Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is
installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe
this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.
■When the compact spare tire attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following systems may
not operate correctly:
●ABS & Brake assist
●VSC
●TRAC
●Navigation system (if equipped)
5
When trouble arises
395
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel
beyond repair.
■When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-
mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
■To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.
■Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the
vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to
when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road sur-
faces.
■Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.
396
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine will not start, even though correct starting procedures are
being followed (P. 116), consider each of the following points.
■The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates
normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Add fuel to the vehicle.
●The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (P. 116)
●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(P. 70)
■The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and head-
lights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low vol-
ume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 40 2 )
●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■The starter motor does not turn over
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an elec-
trical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However,
an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 397)
5
When trouble arises
397
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an
interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is functioning normally.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15 sec-
onds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
■The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and head-
lights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
●The battery may be discharged. (P. 40 2 )
●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.
Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
398
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be
a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental opera-
tion of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer
immediately.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that
the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY
mode.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.
Press the shift lock override but-
ton.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
5
When trouble arises
399
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using the other
key and the key number stamped on your key number plate.
400
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly
Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions
Remove the cover on the driver’s
door handle using the mechanical
key in order to perform the follow-
ing operations.
Locks all doors
Closes the windows/standard
moon roof (turn and hold)
Unlocks the door
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver's door. Turning the key
once again unlocks the other
doors.
Opens the windows/standard
moon roof (turn and hold)
Return the cover to the original
position after use.
If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted
(P. 26) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is
depleted, smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote
control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened or the
engine can be started by following the procedure below.
5
When trouble arises
401
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Lexus emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate that
the start function cannot detect the
electronic key that is touched to
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch if any of the doors is opened
and closed while the key is touched
to the switch.
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 10
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed.
(P. 116)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 10 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be oper-
ated, contact your Lexus dealer.
STEP 1
STEP 2
■Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as you nor-
mally do when stopping the engine.
■Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommend that the elec-
tronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 33 4 )
STEP 3
402
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s
battery is discharged.
You can call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle
with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps
below.
Remove the cover.
Connecting the jumper cables.
If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a
cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce
the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
STEP 1
STEP 2
5
When trouble arises
403
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged
The engine cannot be started by push-starting.
■Avoiding a discharged battery
●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.
●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a
low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to the IGNITION ON mode,
then start the vehicle’s engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer
as soon as possible.
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
404
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not
unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.
●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” termi-
nals.
●Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the
battery.
■Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts
contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when han-
dling the battery.
●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to
allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehi-
cle body.
●Do not lean over the battery.
●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immedi-
ately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be
received.
●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other
battery-related parts.
●Do not allow children near the battery.
NOTICE
■When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any
of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
5
When trouble arises
405
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air
conditioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine and carefully lift the hood.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Remove the engine compartment cover. (P. 304)
Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.
If the fan is operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the engine.
If the fan is not operating:
Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus
dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and inspect
the radiator core (radiator) for
any leaks.
Add engine coolant if required.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency measure if engine coolant
is unavailable. (P. 414 )
STEP 1
STEP 2
STEP 3
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 6
406
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
●The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is
experienced.
●Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle
●Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the engine is
running.
●Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released
under pressure.
NOTICE
■When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly
can cause damage to the engine.
Install the reservoir cap.
Make sure that the engine cool-
ant reservoir hose is positioned
as shown in the illustration.
Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
STEP 7
5
When trouble arises
407
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surround-
ing area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle
may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme
caution.
■When shifting the shift lever
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an
accident and result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
●Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
●If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require
towing to be freed.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes
stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
●Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift lever in P.
●Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
●Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide trac-
tion under the tires.
●Restart the engine.
●Carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.
408
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Vehicle specifications 6
409
6-1. Specifications.................. 410
Maintenance data
(fuel, oil level, etc.) ............... 410
Fuel information..................... 420
Tire information...................... 423
6-2. Customization................ 435
Customizable features ........ 435
6-3. Initialization ................... 440
Items to initialize.................... 440
410
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weight
*: Unladen vehicle
Overall length 191.1 in. (4855 mm)
Overall width 71.7 in. (1820 mm)
Overall height * 57.1 in. (1450 mm)
Wheelbase 109.3 in. (2775 mm)
Tr e a d Front 62.0 in. (1575 mm)
Rear 61.6 in. (1565 mm)
Vehicle capacity weight
(Occupants + luggage) 900 lb. (410 kg)
Towing capacity
(trailer weight + cargo weight) 1000 lb. (450 kg)
411
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Vehicle identification
■Vehicle identification
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used
in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the top
left of the instrument panel.
This number is also on the Certifi-
cation Label.
■Engine number
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown.
412
6-1. Specifications
Engine
Fuel
Model 2GR-FE
Typ e 6-cylinder V type,
4-cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.70 3.27 in. (94.0 83.0 mm)
Displacement 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm3)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
Fuel tank capacity 18.5 gal. (70 L, 15.4 lmp.gal)
413
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Lubrication system
Oil viscosity
●
The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil
which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
●The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is at its operating
temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the
vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.
Oil capacity
(drain and refill)
with filter 6.4 qt. (6.1 L, 5.3 lmp.qt.)
without filter 6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade ILSAC multi-grade engine oil
Recommended oil
viscosity
Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent to satisfy the grade and viscosity shown
below.
5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel
efficiency.
Outside temperature
414
6-1. Specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity 9.5 qt.
(9.0 L, 7.9 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-sili-
cate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate cool-
ant with long-life organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
DENSO
Gap
FK20HR11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only above spark plugs. Do not adjust gaps for your engine performance or
smooth driveability.
415
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Electrical system
Automatic Transaxle
*: The fluid capacity is a reference quantity. If replacement is necessary, contact
your Lexus dealer.
Battery
Open voltage at
68F (20C):
12.6 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after
the engine and all the lights are turned
off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Fluid capacity* 6.76 qt. (6.4 L, 5.63 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause
deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transaxle accompanied by vibration,
and ultimately damage the automatic transaxle of your vehicle.
416
6-1. Specifications
Brakes
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 112 lbf (500 N, 51
kgf) while the engine is running.
*2: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 67.4 lbf (300 N,
30.6 kgf).
Steering
Pedal clearance *12.4 in. (61 mm) Min.
Pedal free play 0.04 0.24 in. (1.0 6.0 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake pedal travel *27 10 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Power steering fluid Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRON® II or III
417
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tires and wheels
Type A
Tire size P215/55R17 93V
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
When driving at high speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h), in countries where such speeds are
permitted by law, add 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/
cm2 or bar) to the front tires and rear tires.
Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation
pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.
Towing a trailer
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Spare:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 7J
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
418
6-1. Specifications
Typ e B
Tire size P215/55R17 93V,
T155/70D17 110M (spare)
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure)
Driving under normal conditions
Front:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)*
Spare:
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)
*:When driving at high speeds above 100
mph (160 km/h), in countries where such
speeds are permitted by law, add 4.3 psi
(30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the front
tires and rear tires. Never exceed the max-
imum cold tire inflation pressure indicated
on the tire sidewall.
Towing a trailer
Front:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm2 or bar)
Wheel size 17 7J, 17 4T (spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
419
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
*:If equipped
A: D4S discharge bulbs
B: H7 halogen bulbs
C: HB3 halogen bulbs
D: HB4 halogen bulbs
E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
F: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
G: Double end bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. WType
Exterior
Headlights (low beam)
Discharge bulbs*
Halogen bulbs*
D4S
H7
35
55
A
B
Headlights (high beam) 9005 60 C
Front fog lights 9006 51 D
Front turn signal lights 21 E
Parking lights and front side
marker lights 5 F
Trunk light 5 G
Rear side marker lights 194 3.8 F
Stop/tail lights 7443 21/5 F
Tail lights 7443 5 F
Rear turn signal lights 21 E
Back-up lights 921 16 F
Outer foot lights 5 F
Interior Vanity lights 8 F
Door courtesy lights 5 F
420
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only
accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■If premium gasoline is not available
If 91 rating gasoline cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an
octane rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91).
■If your engine knocks
●Consult your Lexus dealer.
●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating
or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you
are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this
does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
Premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research Octane
Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of
ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
421
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■Gasoline quality standards
●Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is
expected to be applied worldwide.
●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission
levels. In the US, category 4 has been adopted.
●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and
customer satisfaction through better performance.
■Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
●Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to
avoid build-up of engine deposits.
●All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep
clean intake systems.
■Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygen-
ates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many
areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle perfor-
mance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline
●Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate con-
tent is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.
●If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower
than 87.
●Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
■Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopen-
tadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-
taining MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this hap-
pens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.
422
6-1. Specifications
NOTICE
■Notice on gasoline quality
●Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic convert-
ers causing the emission control system to malfunction.
●Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.
●Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 may result in engine
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be cor-
rected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.
■Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot start-
ing, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.
■When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
423
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire information
Typ i ca l t i re sy mbo l s
Standard tire
Compact spare tire
424
6-1. Specifications
Tire size (P. 425)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 425)
Location of treadwear indicators (P. 318)
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands
which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a
bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A
tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pres-
sure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 322)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 417)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
Summer tire or all season tire (P. 323)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a
summer tire.
TEMPORARY USE ONLY (P. 392)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emer-
gency use only.
425
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
Tire size
■Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
426
6-1. Specifications
■Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S.A. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehi-
cles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read
this information.
427
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
■Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
■Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and
they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) trac-
tion.
428
6-1. Specifications
■Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing
the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire fail-
ure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for
three hours or more, or has not been driven more
than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition
Maximum inflation pres-
sure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire
may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire
Recommended inflation
pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a man-
ufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those standard
items which may be replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
429
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equip-
ment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants speci-
fied in the second column of Table 1* that follows
Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in
the third column of Table 1* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty 12-volt battery, and special trim
Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by
style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68
kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity
Tire related term Meaning
430
6-1. Specifications
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined by
distributing to each axle its share of curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (dis-
tributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and
dividing by two
Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in
the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread
Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber
which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of
the tire extending to cord material
Tire related term Meaning
431
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim
system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges
pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit
on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses
the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless
tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire
Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the
carcass
Intended outboard side-
wall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily
intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles
Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a
given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible
inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire
may be inflated
Tire related term Meaning
432
6-1. Specifications
Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension
requirements
Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to
labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipur-
pose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent
plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fab-
ric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted
on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to
the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at
higher inflation pressures than the corresponding
standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to
labeling, decoration, or protective bands
Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead
Tire related term Meaning
433
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
*:Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord
material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater
than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard
Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test
as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test
Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a
Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces,
and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( )
on at least one sidewall
Te s t r im The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be
any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire
Tr e a d That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the
road
Tre a d r i b A tread section running circumferentially around a
tire
Tre a d s e p a r at i o n Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of
wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly
securely during testing
Tire related term Meaning
434
6-1. Specifications
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 22 in front
5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat
435
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
Smart access
system with
push-button
start
(P. 22)
Smart access system with
push-button start ON OFF
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) ON OFF
Operation signal
(Buzzer) ON OFF
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personal-
ized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires spe-
cialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus
dealership.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
436
6-2. Customization
Wireless
remote con-
trol
(P. 3 4)
Wireless remote control ON OFF
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Automatic door lock
function to be activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
ON OFF
Time elapsed before auto-
matic door lock function is
activated if door is not
opened after being
unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers) ON OFF
Operation signal (Buzzer
volume) Level 7 Level 0 to 7
Door lock buzzer ON OFF
Trunk unlocking function ON OFF
Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold Push twice
One push
Panic function ON OFF
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
437
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Door lock
(P. 37 )
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in
one step, all
doors
unlocked in
two steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function OFF ON
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors OFF ON
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors ON OFF
Shifting gears to position
other than P locks all
doors.
ON OFF
Power win-
dows
(P. 6 0 )
Linked mechanical key
operation
ON
(Open and
close)
OFF
Open only
Close only
Wireless remote control
linked operation
ON
(Open only) OFF
Linked entry function ON OFF
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
438
6-2. Customization
Moon roof
(standard
type)
(P. 6 3 )
Linked mechanical key
operation
ON
(Open and
close)
OFF
Open only
Close only
Linked operation of com-
ponents when mechanical
key is used
Slide only Tilt only
Wireless remote control
linked operation
ON
(Open only) OFF
Linked operation of com-
ponents when wireless
remote control used
Slide only Tilt only
Linked entry function ON OFF
Automatic
light control
system
(P. 1 3 4)
Light sensor sensitivity Level 3 Level 1 to 5
Tim e elap sed bef ore
headlights automatically
turn off after doors are
closed
30 seconds
0 seconds
60 seconds
90 seconds
Lights
(P. 1 3 4)
Daytime running light sys-
tem (USA only) ON OFF
Intuitive park-
ing assist
(P. 1 5 3)
Back sensor operation
display and buzzer ON OFF
Buzzer volume Level 3 Level 1 to 5
Distance which a sensor
detects 4.5 ft. (150 cm) 1.8 ft. (60 cm)
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
439
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Multi-information display (P. 130)
Illumination
(P. 249)
Time elapsed before lights
turn off 15 seconds 7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked ON OFF
Operation after the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch turned OFF
ON OFF
Front foot well lighting ON OFF
Outer foot light ON OFF
Seat belt
reminder
(P. 366)
Vehicle speed linked seat
belt reminder buzzer ON OFF
Country Available languages
Canada English and French
Item Function Default setting Customized
setting
440
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Engine oil maintenance
data (USA only) After changing engine oil P. 305
Tire pressure warning
system
When changing the tire inflation pres-
sure by changing traveling speed or
load weight, etc.
P. 31 9
After reconnecting or performing maintenance on the battery, the follow-
ing items must be initialized for normal system operation.
442
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-
free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
.
443
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted
from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
●Déroulez la sangle diagonale de
telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur
l'épaule, sans pour autant être
en contact avec votre cou ou
glisser de votre épaule.
●Placez la sangle abdominale le
plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
●Réglez la position du dossier de
siège. Asseyez-vous le dos le
plus droit possible et calez-vous
bien dans le siège.
●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
Guide de confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière extérieurs)
Si la sangle diagonale est proche
du cou de la personne, faites
coulisser le guide de confort de
ceinture de sécurité vers l'avant.
444
Entretien et soin
■
Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau savonneuse tiède.
Profitez de l'occasion pour vérifier régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont pas
effilochées, entaillées, ou ne paraissent pas exagérément usées.
ATTENTION
■
Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne sont pas
entaillées, effilochées, et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés. N'utilisez pas
une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture
de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie de protection de l'occupant en
cas d'accident.
446
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-Lock Brake System
AFS Adaptive Front lighting System
AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS Child Restraint System
DISP Display
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event data recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
HI High
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
INT Intermittent
LED Light Emitting Diode
LO Low
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
PCS Pre-Collision System
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
TRAC Traction Control
447
Abbreviation list
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
448
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C .............................................................184
ABS.............................................................. 159
Adaptive front lighting system ......... 135
AFS.............................................................. 135
Air conditioning filter ..........................332
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter ....................... 332
Automatic air conditioning
system................................................... 184
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions........... 79
Airbag precautions for your
child..........................................................83
Airbag warning light ........................365
Curtain shield airbag operating
conditions..............................................80
Curtain shield airbag
precautions ..........................................83
Front passenger occupant
classification system.........................88
General airbag precautions ...........83
Locations of airbags.............................77
Modification and disposal of
airbags.................................................... 87
Proper driving posture ............. 75, 83
Side airbag operating
conditions..............................................80
Side airbag precautions ....................83
SRS airbags ..............................................77
Alarm.............................................................72
Antenna..................................................... 198
Anti-lock brake system....................... 159
Armrest .................................................... 267
Ashtray...................................................... 262
Audio input............................................... 218
Audio system
Antenna....................................................198
Audio input.............................................218
AUX adapter........................................218
CD player/changer...........................201
MP3/WMA disc................................207
Optimal use ........................................... 215
Portable music player.......................218
Radio .........................................................194
Steering wheel audio switch.......... 219
Automatic air conditioning
system ..................................................... 184
Automatic headlight leveling
system ......................................................136
Automatic light control system.........134
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission .....................119
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P...................................398
S mode .....................................................120
AUX adapter.......................................... 218
Auxiliary box ..........................................258
A
449
Alphabetical index
Back-up lights
Wattage ...................................................419
Battery
Checking.................................................314
If the vehicle has discharged
battery..................................................402
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................169
Bluetooth®............................................... 221
Brake
Fluid..............................................................311
Parking brake........................................ 123
Brake assist ..............................................159
Break-in tips .............................................109
Care
Exterior................................................... 284
Interior..................................................... 287
Seat belts ...............................................288
Cargo capacity .......................................165
Cargo hooks...........................................272
CD changer .............................................201
CD player..................................................201
Chains...........................................................171
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition.................... 93
Booster seats, installation................. 98
Convertible seats, definition ........... 93
Convertible seats, installation ........ 98
Front passenger occupant
classification system ........................88
Infant seats, definition ......................... 93
Infant seats, installation.......................98
Installing CRS with lower
anchorages...........................................101
Installing CRS with seat belts..........98
Installing CRS with top straps....... 102
Child safety
Airbag precautions..............................83
Battery precautions ...............316, 404
Child restraint system.........................93
Child-protectors ...................................38
How your child should wear
the seat belt ..........................................53
Installing child restraints.....................97
Moon roof precautions......................66
Power window lock switch..............60
Power window precautions ............62
Removed electronic key battery
precautions....................................... 335
Seat belt comfort guide .......................51
Seat belt extender precautions......55
Seat belt precautions ..........................54
Seat heater precautions..................265
Trunk precautions................................. 42
Child-protectors......................................38
Cigarette lighter....................................263
Cleaning
Exterior....................................................284
Interior .....................................................287
Seat belts............................................... 288
Clock .......................................................... 261
Compass .................................................. 279
Condenser .................................................311
Console box ...........................................253
B
C
450
Alphabetical index
Cooling system
Engine overheating ..........................405
Cornering assist sensors ....................153
Cruise control
Cruise control .........................................141
Dynamic radar cruise control.......144
Cup holders ............................................256
Curtain shield airbags............................ 77
Customizable features .......................435
Daytime running light system ........... 135
Defogger
Rear window........................................... 191
Side mirror............................................... 191
Dimension.................................................410
Dinghy towing......................................... 182
Display
Dynamic radar cruise control.......144
Trip information......................................131
Warning message.............................375
Do-it-yourself maintenance .............296
Door courtesy lights
Door courtesy lights......................... 249
Wattage....................................................419
Doors
Door glasses...........................................60
Door lock................................. 22, 34, 37
Side mirrors.............................................58
Driver's seat belt reminder light .....366
Driving
Break-in tips.......................................... 109
Correct posture.................................... 75
Procedures............................................108
Winter driving tips...............................169
Driving position memory......................44
Electronic key
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................400
Emergency, in case of
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................400
If the engine will not start...............396
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P...................................398
If the vehicle has discharged
battery ................................................. 402
If the warning buzzer sounds...... 364
If the warning light turns on.......... 364
If the warning message is
displayed.............................................375
If you have a flat tire ........................386
If you lose your keys ........................ 399
If you think something is
wrong ..................................................360
If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 407
If your vehicle needs to be
towed................................................... 354
If your vehicle overheats................405
Engine
Compartment.....................................303
Engine switch..........................................116
Hood .......................................................300
How to start the engine .....................116
Identification number ..........................411
If the engine will not start...............396
Ignition switch .........................................116
Overheating ........................................405
Engine compartment cover.............304
D
E
451
Alphabetical index
Engine coolant
Capacity...................................................414
Checking...............................................309
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................169
Engine coolant temperature
gauge.......................................................124
Engine immobilizer system..................70
Engine oil
Capacity...................................................413
Checking...............................................305
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................169
Engine oil maintenance data...........308
Event data recorder.............................362
Floor mat.................................................... 271
Fluid
Brake ...........................................................311
Power steering fluid ........................... 312
Washer..................................................... 317
Fog lights
Switch........................................................ 137
Wattage ...................................................419
Foot well lighting ...................................249
Front fog lights
Switch........................................................ 137
Wattage ...................................................419
Front passenger occupant
classification system ........................... 88
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light..................................... 366
Front seats
Adjustment...............................................43
Driving position memory..................44
Seat position memory ........................ 47
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs........................347
Wattage................................................... 419
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................347
Wattage................................................... 419
Fuel
Capacity ...................................................412
Fuel gauge...............................................124
Fuel pump shut off system.............. 361
Gas station information................. 460
Information............................................420
Refueling....................................................67
Fuel door ..................................................... 67
Fuel filler door ........................................... 67
Fuel pump shut off system.................. 361
Fuses ..........................................................336
Garage door opener .......................... 274
Gas station information......................460
Gauges ...................................................... 124
Glove box................................................252
Glove box light ......................................253
Grocery bag hooks ............................. 272
F
G
452
Alphabetical index
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)
Bluetooth®.............................................221
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)..........................221
Head restraints
Adjusting .................................................. 49
Headlight aim.........................................344
Headlights
Discharge headlights
precautions .......................................352
Replacing light bulbs........................345
Switch ........................................................134
Wattage....................................................419
Heaters
Seat heaters..........................................265
Side mirror............................................... 191
Hood ......................................................... 300
Hooks
Cargo hooks ........................................272
Grocery bag hooks ..........................272
I/M test......................................................295
Identification number
Engine .........................................................411
Vehicle........................................................411
Ignition switch............................................116
Illuminated entry system ....................249
Indicator lights......................................... 126
Initialization
Items to initialize.................................440
Inside rear view mirror ..........................57
Interior lights
Interior lights...........................................251
Switch ........................................................251
Intuitive parking assist.......................... 153
Jack
Positioning a floor jack.....................301
Replacing the wheel ........................386
Jack handle .............................................386
Keyless entry ............................................. 34
Keys
Electronic key .........................................20
Engine switch..........................................116
If the electronic key does not
operate properly............................400
If you lose your keys ........................ 399
Key number..............................................20
Keyless entry............................................34
Keys..............................................................20
Mechanical key ......................................20
Wireless remote control key...........34
Light bulbs
Replacing .............................................. 345
Wattage...................................................419
Lights
Door courtesy lights.........................249
Fog light switch .................................... 137
Headlights switch................................ 134
Interior light switch ............................249
Outer foot lights..................................249
Personal light switch..........................251
Replacing light bulbs....................... 345
Shift lever lighting...............................249
Turn signal lever....................................122
Vanity lights.......................................... 260
Wattage...................................................419
Load capacity.......................................... 168
H
I
J
K
L
453
Alphabetical index
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 296
General maintenance......................292
Maintenance data ...............................410
Maintenance requirements..........290
Meter
Instrument panel light control .......125
Meters....................................................... 124
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror .......................57
Side mirror heater.................................191
Side mirrors.............................................58
Vanity mirrors .....................................260
Moon roof ...................................................63
MP3 disc ..................................................207
Multi-information display....................130
Odometer................................................. 124
Oil
Engine oil...............................................305
Opener
Fuel filler door .........................................67
Hood .......................................................300
Trunk............................................................. 41
Outer foot lights
Outer foot lights................................. 249
Wattage ...................................................419
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding.........................58
Mirror position memory ....................44
Outside temperature display............. 131
Overhead console .............................. 255
Overheating, Engine.......................... 405
Parking assist sensors.......................... 153
Parking brake.......................................... 123
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs........................347
Switch........................................................ 134
Wattage................................................... 419
PCS ............................................................. 162
Personal lights
Switch........................................................ 251
Power outlet............................................264
Power steering fluid.............................. 312
Power windows ........................................60
Pre-collision system.............................. 162
Radar cruise control............................. 144
Radiator .......................................................311
Radio................................................................ 194
Radio data system ................................. 195
RDS ............................................................. 195
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs........................345
Wattage................................................... 419
Rear sunshade .......................................268
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................345
Wattage................................................... 419
Rear window defogger .........................191
Replacing
Electronic key battery......................334
Fuses.........................................................336
Light bulbs.............................................345
Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners..........................................442
M
O
P
R
454
Alphabetical index
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt..........................51
Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 52
Child restraint system
installation ............................................. 97
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts.....................................288
Emergency Locking Retractor...... 52
How to wear your seat belt.............50
How your child should wear
the seat belt.......................................... 53
Pregnant women,
proper seat belt use......................... 52
Reminder light.....................................366
Seat belt extenders..............................53
Seat belt pretensioners........................51
Seat heaters ............................................265
Seat position memory............................ 47
Seat ventilators ......................................265
Seating capacity.....................................168
Seats
Adjustment............................................... 43
Adjustment precautions.................... 43
Child seats/child restraint
system installation............................. 97
Cleaning................................................. 287
Driver’s seat position memory....... 44
Front passenger seat position
memory...................................................47
Head restraint......................................... 49
Properly sitting in the seat................ 75
Seat heaters..........................................265
Ventilated seats..................................265
Service reminder indicators ............. 126
Shift lever
Automatic transmission .....................119
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P...................................398
Shift lever lighting................................. 249
Shift lock system....................................398
Side airbags ................................................77
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs........................347
Switch........................................................ 134
Wattage...................................................419
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding......................... 58
Mirror position memory....................44
Smart access system with
push-button start
Entry function .......................................... 22
Starting the engine................................116
Spare tire
Inflation pressure................................326
Spare tire...............................................386
Spark plug .................................................414
Specifications.......................................... 410
Speech command switch*
Speedometer...........................................124
Steering wheel
Audio switches..................................... 219
Power adjustment................................ 56
Steering wheel position
memory ..................................................44
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs....................... 345
Wattage...................................................419
Storage feature ..................................... 252
S
455
Alphabetical index
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck .... 407
Sun visors................................................. 259
Sunshade
Rear..........................................................268
Roof............................................................. 65
Switch
Engine switch ..........................................116
Fog light switch..................................... 137
Ignition switch..........................................116
Light switches........................................134
Power door lock switch.....................37
Power window switch........................60
Window lock switch...........................60
Wipers and washer switch.............138
Tachometer..............................................124
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs .......................345
Switch........................................................134
Wattage ...................................................419
Talk switch*
Telephone switch*
Theft deterrent system
Alarm...........................................................72
Engine immobilizer system............. 70
Theft prevention labels ..........................74
Tire inflation pressure..........................326
Tire information
Glossary ................................................ 428
Size ........................................................... 425
Tire identification number............. 425
Uniform tire quality grading......... 426
Tires
Chains ........................................................ 171
Checking ................................................318
If you have a flat tire......................... 386
Inflation pressure................................326
Inflation pressure sensor................. 319
Information............................................423
Replacing.............................................. 386
Rotating tires .........................................318
Size..............................................................417
Snow tires ................................................173
Spare tire............................................... 386
Tools...........................................................386
Total load capacity ................................168
Towing
Dinghy towing...................................... 182
Emergency towing............................354
Trailer towing.........................................175
TRAC.......................................................... 159
Traction control...................................... 159
Trip meter ................................................. 124
Trunk
Extending a space.............................270
Opener ........................................................41
Trunk light
Trunk light................................................. 42
Wattage................................................... 419
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs........................345
Switch.........................................................122
Wattage................................................... 419
T
*: Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
456
Alphabetical index
Vanity lights
Vanity lights..........................................260
Wattage....................................................419
Vanity mirrors ........................................260
Vehicle identification number ............411
Vehicle stability control.......................159
Ventilators ...............................................265
VSC.............................................................159
Warning buzzers
Brake system .......................................364
Downshifting............................................121
Open door ..........................................366
Seat belt reminder.............................366
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system...................365
Brake assist system...........................365
Brake system .......................................364
Charging system ...............................365
Low fuel level.......................................366
Low tire pressure warning
light........................................................366
Malfunction indicator lamp...........365
Master warning light........................366
Open door ...........................................366
Pre-collision system.........................365
Pretensioners.......................................365
Rear light failure warning light.....366
Seat belt reminder light ..................366
SRS airbags ..........................................365
Warning messages
Dynamic radar
cruise control....................... 376, 378
Engine oil level.................................... 378
Engine oil maintenance.................. 378
Engine oil pressure............................375
Hood ....................................................... 378
Intuitive parking assist
sensor...................................... 376, 378
Moon roof............................................. 378
Open door........................................... 378
Parking brake...................................... 378
Pre-collision system............. 376, 378
Smart access system with
push-button start ...........................383
Steering lock.........................................376
Traction control...................................376
Trunk........................................................ 378
Vehicle stability control...................376
Washer fluid ........................................ 378
Washer
Checking................................................. 317
Preparing and checking
before winter......................................169
Switch........................................................138
Washing and waxing...........................284
Weight
Cargo capacity ....................................165
Load limits...............................................168
Weight......................................................410
Wheels......................................................330
Window glasses ......................................60
Window lock switch............................... 60
V
W
457
Alphabetical index
Windows
Power windows ....................................60
Rear window defogger......................191
Washer.....................................................138
Windshield wipers
Position..................................................... 172
Windshield wipers..............................138
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery...................... 334
Wireless remote control key...........34
WMA disc................................................207
458
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 386 If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 3 96 If the engine will not start
P. 70 Engine immobilizer system
P. 400 If the electronic key does not operate
properly
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 398
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 405 If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 399 If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 402 If the vehicle battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 37 Doors
The horn begins to sound
P. 72 Alarm
The vehicle is stuck in mud or
sand
P. 407 If the vehicle becomes stuck
459
What to do if...
■Warning lights
The warning light or indicator
light comes on
P. 3 6 4 If a warning light turns on or a warning
buzzer sounds...
or or
P. 364 P. 365
P. 36 6
or
P. 365
or
P. 366 P. 36 6
P. 365 P. 36 6
P. 366 P. 365
P. 366 P. 36 6
P. 365
Brake system warning light
Malfunction indicator lamp
“ABS” warning light
Driver’s seat belt reminder
light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Low fuel level warning light
SRS warning light
Master warning light
Open door warning light
Pre-collision system warn-
ing light
Rear light failure warning
light
Tire pressure warning light
Charging system warning
light
460
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 300
Trunk opener
P. 41
Fuel filler door
P. 67
Hood lock release lever
P. 300
Fuel filler door opener
P. 67
Tire inflation pressure
P. 41 7
Fuel tank capacity 18.5 gal. (70L, 15.4 lmp.gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 68, 412
Cold tire inflation
pressure P. 41 7
Engine oil capacity
(Drain and refill)
qt. (L, Imp.qt.)
With filter 6.4 (6.1, 5.3)
Without filter 6.0 (5.7, 5.0)
Engine oil type
Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil P. 413
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30
